PDS Drawing Manager PD Draw

Plant Design System (PDS)
Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)
Version 2011 (V12)
Monday, June 20, 2011
DPDS3-PB-200004H
Copyright
Copyright © 1984-2011 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools,
ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle
Corporation and/or its affiliates. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems Inc, all rights reserved. Other brands
and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface PDS ................................................................................................................................................. 7
Drawing Manager Overview........................................................................................................................ 9

Before Using Drawing Manager ............................................................................................................ 10
Drawing Manager Theory of Operation ................................................................................................ 10
Drawings ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Drawing Views ................................................................................................................................ 11
Drawing Borders ............................................................................................................................. 12
Drawing Plot Size ........................................................................................................................... 13
Seed Files ....................................................................................................................................... 14
Drawing Categories ........................................................................................................................ 16
Cells ................................................................................................................................................ 17
Database Tables ............................................................................................................................ 18
Standard Notes / Code Lists .......................................................................................................... 20
Labels ............................................................................................................................................. 20
Drawing Manager's Output ............................................................................................................. 21
Customizing Drawing Manager ...................................................................................................... 21
Drawing Management ............................................................................................................................... 29
Drawing Manager ....................................................................................................................................... 31

Create Options ...................................................................................................................................... 32
Create Drawing ............................................................................................................................... 33
Create Drawing from ASCII File ..................................................................................................... 35
Copy Drawing ................................................................................................................................. 39
Create Drawing View ...................................................................................................................... 43
Copy Drawing View ........................................................................................................................ 53
Create Composite Drawing View ................................................................................................... 57
Revise Revision .............................................................................................................................. 68
Revise Options ...................................................................................................................................... 72
Revise Drawing .............................................................................................................................. 73
Revise Drawing View...................................................................................................................... 75
Revise Orientation .......................................................................................................................... 80
Delete Options ...................................................................................................................................... 90
Delete Drawing ............................................................................................................................... 91
Select Drawing - Delete Drawing View........................................................................................... 91
Report - Drawing Management Data .................................................................................................... 95
Report Models Form ............................................................................................................................. 97
Report Format Form ....................................................................................................................... 99
Discrimination Data Form ............................................................................................................. 102
Discrimination Data Deletion Form ............................................................................................... 114
Search Criteria Data Form ........................................................................................................... 115
Report Form ................................................................................................................................. 120
Report Multiple Submit Form ........................................................................................................ 127
Approve Drawing................................................................................................................................. 128
Report Management Defaults Form.................................................................................................... 130
Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 3

Contents
Graphics Environment ............................................................................................................................ 131

Drawing ............................................................................................................................................... 131
View .................................................................................................................................................... 131
Viewing Options ............................................................................................................................ 133
Viewing Commands...................................................................................................................... 134
Viewing, More Commands .................................................................................................................. 135
Viewing Directions ........................................................................................................................ 137
View Depth ................................................................................................................................... 138
File ...................................................................................................................................................... 139
Plot................................................................................................................................................ 139
File Design .................................................................................................................................... 140
Exit ................................................................................................................................................ 140
Active Options .............................................................................................................................. 140
Select Another Drawing ................................................................................................................ 143
Drawing Selection......................................................................................................................... 143
Drawing Categories ............................................................................................................................ 144
Review/Revise Category .............................................................................................................. 144
Add Category................................................................................................................................ 145
Remove Category......................................................................................................................... 146
Element Commands ........................................................................................................................... 147
Settings Command ............................................................................................................................. 147
User Commands ................................................................................................................................. 147
Composing Drawings.............................................................................................................................. 149

Create Drawing View .......................................................................................................................... 150
Saved View ......................................................................................................................................... 152
Named Item......................................................................................................................................... 153
Named Item by Model .................................................................................................................. 154
Named Item by Project ................................................................................................................. 156
Define View Location .......................................................................................................................... 158
Create Composite Drawing View ........................................................................................................ 159
Create Composite Drawing View - Define Views ......................................................................... 161
Create Composite Drawing View - Saved View ........................................................................... 162
Copy Drawing View ................................................................................................................................. 169

Create Section Drawing View ............................................................................................................. 171
Create Composite Plan Drawing View ................................................................................................ 173
Compose Drawing .............................................................................................................................. 176
Viewing Hidden Line Graphics ............................................................................................................ 177
Compose Drawing View ...................................................................................................................... 180
Reference Models ........................................................................................................................ 182
Delete Drawing View ........................................................................................................................... 192
Align Drawing View....................................................................................................................... 192
Revise View Data ......................................................................................................................... 194
Revise Orientation ........................................................................................................................ 196
Unassigned Views ........................................................................................................................ 197
Area Volume Graphics ................................................................................................................. 198
Revision Markers ..................................................................................................................................... 201

Display Report..................................................................................................................................... 202
Place Cell ............................................................................................................................................ 204
4 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Contents
Place Text and Line ............................................................................................................................ 205

Overlay Drawing.................................................................................................................................. 207
Review Attribute .................................................................................................................................. 208
Measure Distance ............................................................................................................................... 208
Drawing Annotation Symbology .......................................................................................................... 210
Name Label ......................................................................................................................................... 211
Edit Text .............................................................................................................................................. 219
Coordinate Label ................................................................................................................................. 220
Automatic Labels................................................................................................................................. 228
Label Fence Contents .................................................................................................................. 231
Revise Text ................................................................................................................................... 231
The Search Criteria - Component Form ....................................................................................... 232
Update Annotation Labels ...................................................................................................................... 237
Vector Hidden Line Manager .................................................................................................................. 239

Symbology Based VHL Drawings ....................................................................................................... 244
Drawing Type and Symbology Map ............................................................................................. 245
Search Criteria for VHL ........................................................................................................................... 249

Search Criteria Data Creation Form ................................................................................................... 250
Search Criteria Revision Form ............................................................................................................ 251
Search Criteria Deletion Form ............................................................................................................ 253
Annotating Drawings .............................................................................................................................. 255

Mass Annotation ................................................................................................................................. 256
Place Labels........................................................................................................................................ 263
Equipment Centerlines ........................................................................................................................ 271
Update Labels ..................................................................................................................................... 275
Plot Manager ............................................................................................................................................ 281

Plot Drawing ........................................................................................................................................ 282
Drawing Categories ............................................................................................................................ 284
Reference Models ............................................................................................................................... 285
Project Planner ........................................................................................................................................ 287

Project Planner Command Menu ........................................................................................................ 287
PlotPlan ........................................................................................................................................ 288
Exit ................................................................................................................................................ 302
View .................................................................................................................................................... 302
File ................................................................................................................................................ 302
Project Setup ........................................................................................................................................... 305

Drawing Type ...................................................................................................................................... 307
Reference Categories ......................................................................................................................... 308
Copy Drawing Type ............................................................................................................................ 310
Remove Reference ............................................................................................................................. 311
Plotting Categories .............................................................................................................................. 312
Label Filter .......................................................................................................................................... 313

Contents
Plot Setup Manager ................................................................................................................................. 315

Create I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................................... 316
Revise I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................................... 317
Delete I/Plot Parameter File ................................................................................................................ 318
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 319

Preface PDS
This document provides command reference information and procedural instructions for the
Plant Design System (PDS) Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) task.
List of PDS Documentation

 DPDS3-PB-200003 - DesignReview Integrator (PD_Review) Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200004 - Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) User's Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200005 - EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200006 - Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash) User's Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200010 - PDS 3D Theory User's Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200013 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume I : Piping
 DPDS3-PB-200015 - PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) User's Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200017 - PDS ISOGEN Reference Guide, Vol. 1
 DPDS3-PB-200022 - PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200023 - PDS Project Setup Technical Reference
 DPDS3-PB-200025 - PDS Stress Analysis Interface (PD_Stress) User's Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200026 - Pipe Supports Modeler Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200028 - Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design) Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200030 - Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200033 - Project Engineer HVAC (PE-HVAC) Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200034 - Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200035 - Report Manager (PD_Report) User's Guide
 DPDS3-PB-200041 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume 2 : Equipment
 DPDS3-PB-200042 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume 3 : Pipe Supports
 DPDS3-PE-200016 - PDS Express Project Creation Quick Start Guide
 DPDS3-PE-200052 - PDS Ortho Draw User's Guide
 DPDS3-PE-200029 - Piping Model Builder (PD_Model) Reference Guide
 DPDS3-PE-200031 - Project Engineer HVAC Getting Started Guide
 DPDS3-PE-200032 - Project Engineer HVAC Overview
 DPDS3-PE-200045 - PDS Label Library Merger Utility
 DPDS3-PE-200047 - PDS Reference Data Auditing Tool
 DPDS3-PE-200048 - Pipe Supports Explorer Utility
 DPDS3-PE-200050 - Batch Services Quick Start Guide
 DPDS3-PE-200051 - Batch Services User's Guide

Preface PDS

SECTION 1
Drawing Manager Overview

The 3D PDS (Plant Design System) products use interactive graphics and database
management techniques to integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant
design.
Since a process plant can be extremely large, PDS uses the following organization to break the
plant into smaller units that can be handled more easily.
A Project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. The
project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. The project constitutes the entire
volume of the project.
A Design Area represents a specified volume of the project for a specific discipline.
A model is a 3D MicroStation file that has a defined discipline and is located within the volume of
the project.
Besides the terms above, which are used in most PDS applications, the Drawing Manager uses
the following terms:
 A drawing is a sheet or a plot used to describe the design of a model design volume (work
area). Many drawings can be created from one model to completely document a design
volume. A drawing can contain more than one drawing view of a model or models.
 A drawing view is a view of a model or models. Each drawing view within a drawing can
have a different scale and each label within a drawing can have a different character size.
 You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the
reference model attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics
for the drawing itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These
model graphics are attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing
views.
 Because the model graphics are reference file attachments, the graphics in the drawings
automatically change as the design changes in the model. In other words, the drawing view
graphics are always up-to-date and synchronized with the model.
 Unlike model graphics, labels, dimensions, and vector hidden-line (VHL) graphics are
"snapshots" of the model. Labels can be updated with the Update Labels commands;
dimensions must be revised by the user; and VHL graphics must be re-generated.
 The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of PDS 3D projects. Each
project consists of a Project Control Database, Project Design Database, piping and
equipment models, reference models (structural, HVAC, electrical raceway, and
user-defined disciplines), a set of drawings, and a collection of reference data. The
reference data may be specific to one project or shared by multiple projects.
 A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator
before you can use them in any of the other PDS 3D modules. Refer to the Project
Administrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up a project.
 The Drawing Manager is used to create and revise, plot, and report on orthographic
production drawings of 3D PDS models.

Before Using Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager uses PDS model files for reference when creating orthographic drawings.
This means that Drawing Manager cannot perform its job until a project has been defined and at
least one model file exists.
Project Setup
A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before
you can use the Drawing Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for
information on the following:
 Loading PDS 3D products.
 Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.
 Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.
 Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS.
Model Files
A set of model files for the project must be defined before you can use the Drawing Manager.
Refer to the following documents for information on creating and manipulating PDS 3D Models.
 Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide
 PDS Equipment Modeling Reference Guide
 MicasPlus ModelDraft Reference Guide
 PE HVAC Modeling Reference Guide
 EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide
Drawing Manager Theory of Operation

This section should familiarize you with the general theory behind how the Drawing Manager
module works, and how it can be customized for suiting your needs. The following topics will be
discussed:
 Drawings (on page 11)
 Drawing Views (on page 11)
 Drawing Borders (on page 12)
 Drawing Plot Size (on page 13)
 Seed Files (on page 14)
 Drawing Categories (on page 16)
 Cells (on page 17)
 Tables (see "Database Tables" on page 18)
 Standard Notes / Code Lists (on page 20)
 Labels (on page 20)
 Drawing Manager's Output (on page 21)
 Customizing Drawing Manager (on page 21)

Drawings
A drawing file does not consist of model graphics; a drawing contains intelligent labels,
MicroStation dimensioning, title block text, VHL graphics, and user text and graphics. The model
graphics are attached as reference files, and are not part of the actual drawing file.
Think of a drawing as a pane of glass (drawing file) under which you can see multiple
overlapping, transparent images (reference files) that correspond to user-defined sections of
various model files. When you annotate a drawing, you are merely placing information on the
pane of glass - not on the images themselves.
The illustration below includes a drawing that references a border file and four other attached
reference model files: equipment, structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway models.
All drawings have a plot size value and can have various levels or categories displayed within
them. Each drawing view can be assigned a scale value.
Drawing Views
A drawing view is a "window" into the model with the following characteristics:
 User-specified scale. (For example, 3/8" = 1'.)
 User-specified viewing direction. (For example, Looking North.)
 User-specified viewing volume. (For example, user-defined high and low Easting, Northing,
and Elevation values, or using the volume of a previously-defined view.)
 User-specification of referenced models. (For example, one or more piping model files, one
or more equipment model files, etc.)
A drawing view can be limited to display only specific portions of the model, or the entire model
(or a part of it) shown from a different perspective, or the entire model (or a part of it) displayed
at a different scale for detail. Views help to document the drawing by allowing the user to display
several orientations or emphasize specific portions of the model.
Changes in any referenced model files are automatically reflected in the drawing view.

Drawing Borders
Borders are user-created MicroStation design files. For an Imperial units project where the
smallest scale to be shown on any drawing is 1/8" = 1', border files should be created with
Master Units =1, Sub Units=12, Positional Units = 195072, and should be drawn in a 1:1 scale.
For example, cutting lines of an A size plot should be 8 1/2 inches and 11 inches long, while the
actual drawing border lines should be offset from the cutting lines by whatever distance you
want.
A sample A-size border design is shown below.
When creating your border files, be sure to obey the drawing type conventions discussed in
Before Using Drawing Manager (on page 10). You must follow the conventions established by
Standard Note 1202 and Standard Note 2000 for drawing size and type.
Do not use any Microstation predefined shapes (square, polygon, etc.) to create the
border or the cutting lines; instead, use lines or line strings. The system hidden line software
(Vector Hidden Line) interprets shapes as surfaces, and may give unpredictable results in the
finished drawing such as clipped or missing graphics.
Border files may contain specific locations for placing text (text nodes). This feature
allows for automatic placement of title block information, among other uses. For more
information about text nodes, refer to the MicroStation documentation.
The Drawing Manager uses the following guidelines to determine which drawing border to
attach:
 The directory and network address for the drawing border is defined in the RDB
Management Data with the Reference Data Manager. This setting is stored in the Project
Control Database for access by the Drawing Manager.
 The file specifications for the drawing borders are determined by the following naming
convention.
dwgbrd_<drawing_type>.<drawing_size>
The drawing_type is the standard note number in Standard Note Type 2000 for drawing types.

The drawing_size is the text for the standard note value corresponding to the drawing size in the
Standard Note Type 1202.
For example, the drawing border name for an 'A' size Equipment Arrangement drawing is
dwgbrd_661.a.
 The center of the border is always 0 for the x, y, and z coordinates.
Drawing Plot Size

The Draw Plot Size Table is located in the drawplotsize file and is copied from the PD_Shell
delivery directory at the time a project is created. This file specifies the view locations within a
drawing on a specific media size. It contains the drawing size standard note, plotting media size,
the four margins that define view location, and the standard engineering notation for the plotting
media size. An example of a drawplotsize file and definitions of each field follows:
Drawing Plot Size Table

!Drawing Cutting Margins from Cutting (Drawing
Size Std Edge Size Size)
Note
! X-1 Y-t X-r Y-b
1 8.5"x11" 0.8125" 0.625" 2.125" 0.625 (A)

2 11"x17" 1" 0.6875" 3" (B)
0.6875"
3 17"x22" 1.1875" 0.75" 3.75" 0.75" (C)
4 24"x36" 1.375" 0.8125" 5.4375" (D)
0.8125"
5 34"x44" 1.5625" 0.875" 6.875" 0.875" (E)

6 28"x40" 1.625" 0.9375" 5.625" 0.9375" (F)

101 840mmx1 56mm 35mm 198mm 35mm (A0)
189mm
102 595mmx8 47mm 30mm 193mm 30mm (A1)
40mm
103 420mmx5 38mm 27mm 190mm 27mm (A2)
95mm
104 297mmx4 33mm 25mm 155mm 72mm (A3)
20mm
105 210mmx2 28mm 24mm 65mm 24mm (A4)
97mm
Drawing Size Std Note --- This is the standard note, referenced from the Standard Note Type
1202, for the drawing size selected.
Cutting Edge Size --- This reflects the actual size of the cutting edge which is the media cutting
edge dimensions around the border that is associated with the drawing size. If plot limits of the
output device are less than cutting edge dimensions, Drawing Manager scales the plot down to
fit within the plotting limits.
If the plot limits are greater than cutting edge dimensions, no fit is performed and the plot border
including cutting lines is generated. Excess paper can be trimmed and the true A, B, C, D, E, F,
or A0, A1, A2, A3, or A4 size drawing sheet remains.
If plot limits are equal to the drawplotsize dimensions, no fit is performed, the plot is generated
and no cutting lines appear because they are coincident with the edges of the plot medium.
Margins from Cutting Edge ---
 X-l --- This defines the horizontal distance from the left cutting edge for composition. (This
value corresponds with X1 as described in Define View Location.)
 X-r --- This defines the horizontal distance from the right cutting edge for composition. (This
value corresponds with X2 as described in Define View Location.)
 Y-t --- This defines the vertical distance from the top cutting edge for composition. (This
value corresponds with Y1 as described in Define View Location.)
 Y-b --- This defines the vertical distance from the bottom cutting edge for composition. (This
value corresponds with Y2 as described in Define View Location.)
Drawing Size --- This is the standard note text for the drawing size.
Seed Files
Seed files control the default "styles" of drawings produced by Drawing Manager. All drawings
based on the same seed file will have the same types of line weights, text heights, colors, units
of measurement, orientation values, default plot categories, etc.
The Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File option on the Project Setup form specifies whether
the default project drawing seed file or an alternate drawing seed file is used for a specific
drawing type. The default project drawing seed file, drwsdz.dgn, is stored in the project directory
and is used as the seed file for all drawing types, unless an alternate is specified by drawing
type.
If the Project Seed File option is specified, all subsequent drawings created will have their line
weights, line types, text options, etc. defined by one seed file data-set. For example, Equipment
Drawings will have exactly the same graphic symbology and dimensioning attributes as
Structural Drawings, Piping Drawings, etc.

You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so. During Project
Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units used in creating a project. Master
units in a Metric project are meters, with subunits being millimeters; however, the project
administrator can designate master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters.
This will ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.
 For more information about working units, refer to Project Administrator (PD_Project).
 For more information about this topic, refer to Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters
(on page 27).
If you want different drawing types to have unique graphic symbology (line weights, types, etc.),
text features (fonts, sizes, etc.) and dimensioning attributes (FT, IN versus ', "), then the
alternate seed file option should be used. Each drawing type may have its own unique seed
data which will be applied to all subsequently created drawings of that type. The alternate seed
file is named draw_seed.<drawing type> and is stored in the project directory. You do not have
to define an alternate seed file for every drawing type, only for those you intend to use.
For example, if Equipment Drawings are to use the alternate seed file, this option would create a
file called draw_seed.3 in the project directory (if 3 is the Code List 2000 value assigned to the
equipment drawing type).
 The <drawing type> code listed value is defined in the Standard Note Library CL2000. Refer
to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information.
 If you edit or remove any drawing types code list entries from the CL2000 library, you must
also make the same change(s) to pdtable_126. Otherwise, the input form for revising the
drawing seed data in the Project Administrator>Project Data Manager displays the
removed drawing types as blank entries.
Once created, the seed data can be customized through the Project Data Manager option of
Project Administrator by selecting Seed, Revise Drawing Data, and the drawing type to be
customized. Only those drawing types which have been defined as Alternate Seed File types
are listed. Project Seedfile is also listed for those drawing types which do not have an alternate.
Once selected, the following 6 data types may be altered:
 Drawing Category Data
 Graphic Symbology Data
 Label Character Sizes
 Drawing Annotation Options
 Reference Database File Specifications
 Hidden Line Symbology Data
If drawings have already been created before alternate seed data has been defined, the
new data may be updated in the existing drawings with the Propagate function in the Project
Data Manager. (Please note that propagate only works on: drawing annotation symbology,
vector hidden line graphics symbology, character sizes for labels, and drawing graphic
symbology data.) The same is true if changes are made throughout the life of the project that
need to be applied to existing drawing files.

Drawing Categories
A category is an "alias" for the Microstation drawing level (1-63) in the drawing file; the category
is a way of assigning a meaningful, name to a specific level so that the designer does not have
to refer to the various drawing levels by number.
When a project is created, the Project Administrator copies the default drawing category names
to the project directory. The name of the copied file is drwcats.txt. You can edit this file to
change the names that are displayed for drawing categories.
Although you can modify the drawing category names, the meaning of a specific category
will not be altered by this change.
Drawing View Specific Labels ;Category 4

Drawing View Identification Labels ;Category 5
Coordinate Labels ;Category 7
Dimensioning ;Category 9
Revision Triangles and Revision ;Category 10
Clouds
Hold Clouds ;Category 11
Reports ;Category 8
Miscellaneous Drawing Graphics ;Category 3
Non-Plotted Drawing Graphics ;Category 12
VHL Plot Date ;Category 2
Matchlines By System ;Category 1
Title Block Data ;Category 6
Battery Limits ;Category 36
Matchlines By User ;Category 37
Centerlines ;Category 38
Dumb Details ;Category 39
Leader Lines for Dumb Details ;Category 40
Extension Lines for Dumb Details ;Category 41
Dimensions for Dumb Details ;Category 42
Coordinates for Dumb Details ;Category 43
Like Line No Labels ;Category 44
Like Equipment No Labels ;Category 45
User-defined drawing annotation ;Category 46
category 11
category 12


category 13
category 14
category 15
category 16
category 17
category 18
category 19
category 20
Each drawing type can also have an alternate list of category names. The name of the alternate
category list is dwg_text_<drawing type>, and it is stored in the project directory. You do not
have to define an alternate drawing type file for every drawing type, although this is an option.
The <drawing type> code listed value is defined in the Standard Note Library CL2000.
Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information.
For example, if Equipment Drawings are to use an alternate drawing category list, a file called
dwg_text_3 must exist in the project directory (if 3 is the Code List 2000 value assigned to the
equipment drawing type). This file must be created externally using a text editor. First, the
contents of the drwcats.txt file should be copied into the appropriately-named alternate drawing
category file. Then, you can edit this file to change the names that are displayed for drawing
categories.
If an alternate drawing category file does not exist in the project directory, or it has been named
incorrectly, the default project category list will be used.
Cells
Cells are used to repeatedly place "dumb" graphics (not associated with the project control
database) within drawings. Cells are created within MicroStation, and are used to place
frequently-used objects like the North arrow and the company logo into the drawing. Another
example of a cell is an eye-wash station; placing a cell representation of an eye-wash station
would keep the desginer from drawing a new one each time one is placed in the drawing.
PDS delivers some cells for drawing annotation, found in the cell library
\win32app\ingr\pdshell\cell\drawing.cel. This cell library is copied to the project directory by the
Project Administrator as a part of project creation. The drawing.cel library in the project directory
must be used for any cells which you intend to use for drawing annotation. The Drawing
Manager attaches this cell library each time you select a drawing for the purpose of drawing
annotation, unless that drawing type has been set to use an alternate cell library.
When the Place Cell command is used, the system prompts you to select the appropriate cell
from a list of cell descriptions. This list of descriptions is found in the file called dwg_cell_list.
This file contains two columns; column one is for the cell name, and column two is for the

description. The descriptions may be edited to suit your needs, but do not change the cell
names.
Each drawing type may use an alternate drawing cell library. The library name and its network
address are specified on the Project Setup form. You must specify the file names for any
alternate cell libraries to be used; however, the cell description list for each alternate cell library
will be named dwg_cell. <drawing type>, and they are stored in the project directory. If a cell
description list file an alternate cell library does not exist, the system will use the default,
dwg_cell_list.
The cell description list file follows this format:
FLOARR FLOW CELL

ARROW
NAR1 PLANT ARROW
NORTH
NAR2 N. ARROW UP RIGHT
NAR3 N. ARROW UP LEFT
NAR4 N. ARROW DOWN LEFT
NAR5 N. ARROW DOWN
RIGHT
cl center line
gradea grade at angle
gradeh grade
horizontal
For more information about cells, refer to Place Cell (on page 204) or refer to the MicroStation
documentation.
Database Tables
PDS stores information about the project and its models, drawings, drawing views, composite
views, piping, equipment, components, etc. in a series of related database tables. Each time a
new model is created, or a new piping component or piece of equipment is placed, or a new
view is created, a new record is placed in the appropriate table(s).
This section includes and describes the tables from the Project Control Database Definition that
are affected by the drawing process. These tables are stored in a file called project.ddl.
You may modify only the column name fields in the project.ddl file; do not edit any
other fields in the database definitions.
The project.ddl file classifies these tables according to the project hierarchy (model
management data, then drawing management data). Each level of the project hierarchy has
further divisions (model management data has tables for engineering discipline data, design
area data, and model data).
The rest of this section provides the name and description of each table affected by the drawing
process.
For more detailed information about the Project Control Database, the project.ddl file, and
table information refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide.

MODEL MANAGEMENT DATA

Engineering Discipline Data
table number = 111, (pdtable_111)
PDS allows up to 10 distinct disciplines per project. When a new discipline is added to the
project, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index
number for that discipline (discipline_indx_no), and a 20-character discipline name
(discipline_name).
Design Area Data
table number = 112 , (pdtable_112)
When a new design area is created, a new record is added to this table. The record includes
such items as the above-mentioned discipline index number (discipline_indx_no), a unique
index number for the area (area_index_no), and the volume coordinates for that design area
(volume_low_x, volume_low_y, volume_low_z, volume_high_x, volume_high_y, and
volume_high_z).
Model Data
table number = 113 , (pdtable_113)
Model files are attached to drawings as reference files; each drawing may have up to 256
reference model files attached. When a new model is created, a record of it gets added to this
table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for the model
(model_index_no), the index numbers for the discipline and design area in which it resides
(discipline_indx_no, and area_index_no), and the file location (path_name, and
network_address).
DRAWING MANAGEMENT DATA

Drawing Data
When a new drawing is created, a record is added to this table. The record includes such items
as a unique index number for that drawing, the name of that drawing type, the approval status
for that drawing, and its revision information, default scale, size, and file location.
Drawing View Data
Each drawing may have up to 15 views. When a new drawing view is created, a new record is
added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for that drawing
view, the view number, view name, view scale, drawing index number, view coordinates, and
drawing view type.
Drawing View Reference Model Data
When a new drawing view is created, a new record is added to this table. This table will never
have more than 256 record entries for a specific drawing view, since the maximum number of
models attached to a drawing is 256. The record includes the unique index number of the
drawing view (dwg_view_index_no), and the index number for the attached model
(model_index_no).
Composite Drawing View Data
A composite view may consist of up to 10 sub-views. When a new composite view is created, a
new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for
that composite drawing view, the composite view number, the composite view name, the

composite view scale, the index number of the associated drawing, and up to ten index numbers
for the sub-views within the composite drawing view.
Drawing Revision Data
This table is used only if revision management data is used. When revision management data is
entered into a drawing, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as
the drawing index number, the revision index number, and the revision number, revision date,
revised by, checked by, and revision description information as entered in the Create Drawing
form of Drawing Manager.
Drawing Setup Data
This table stores the default information about drawing types that is established using the
Project Setup form. The record includes such items as the default size, scale, and seed file.
Reference Model Display Category Setup Data
This table holds the default display status of drawing categories for reference models attached
to drawings. This data is established using the Drawing Manager's Project Setup form.
Plotting Default Data
This table allows use of customized iparms files (for plotting with specific pen tables or for
rotating plots, etc.).
Standard Notes / Code Lists

PDS uses code-listed standard notes to ensure that all users share common terms for use in
drawing annotation. Code lists are also used to allow some of the Drawing Manager conventions
to have revisable field names; for instance, Drawing Type is standard note 2000. The
code-listed values for standard note 2000 are the "names" of the drawing types that appear in
the scroll list when the Create Drawing feature is used.
For more information about standard notes and code lists, refer to the Reference Data
Manager: Reference Guide.
Labels
Drawing Manager allows placement of name labels and coordinate labels for annotation
purposes. These labels are placed through the Drawing Manager interface and are "intelligent";
the labels will change if the item they describe changes, but only after one of the Update Labels
commands have been executed.
"Dumb" text, text that has no association with the PDS database, can also be placed in
drawings. Dumb text can be placed using the Place Text button in the Place Labels palette, or
through "raw" MicroStation.
You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so. During Project
Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units used in creating a project. Master
units in a Metric project are meters, with subunits being millimeters; however, the project
administrator can designate master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters.
This will ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.
For more information about working units, refer to Project Administrator (PD_Project).

Drawing Manager's Output

Drawing Manager's outputs are plotted drawings and reports based on the drawings. Plotting or
printing requires that queues be created so that the Drawing Manager will know where to send
the output.
Plots
Before plotting can be done, a plot queue must be established so that Drawing Manager will
know where to send the data to be plotted.
Reports
Drawing Manager can generate reports based on the information written in the project control
database. Reports require a format file and a discrimination data file in order to specify the
format, content, and scope of reports generated. Reports can be saved as ASCII files, or they
can be sent to a printer.
Before reports can be printed, a print queue must be established so that the Drawing Manager
will know where to send the data to be printed. You may also refer to the Report Manager User's
Guide for more detailed information about reporting capabilities.
Customizing Drawing Manager

Many aspects of Drawing Manager can be customized to meet your specific requirements, and
several of these procedures are discussed in this section. However, this section is not intended
to cover every 3D customization issue.
The following topics are discussed:
 Automatic Title Block Generation (on page 21)
 Supplemental Title Block Data (on page 25)
 Nominal Pipe Diameter Value (on page 26)
 Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters (on page 27)
You may refer to the index (under customization, among other keywords) for more topics about
customizing this software.
Automatic Title Block Generation

MicroStation allows you to place text nodes in design files. Text nodes are pre-defined locations
for text to be placed. They may be placed within the title block area of your border files. The text
nodes must be created within the drawing border prior to using the automated title block feature.
You may place the text nodes on any level in the drawing border, but you must ensure
that this level is not displayed so that the nodes will not be displayed on the plotted drawing.
When the automatic title block option is executed, all text nodes in the title block will be replaced
by the associated database string and user-defined text. This data will be created on a level
associated with the Title Block Data category.
For more information about using text nodes, refer to the MicroStation documentation.
Within PD_Draw, the Create Drawing and Approve Drawing commands both provide an option
to load associated text into pre-defined text nodes in the title block of a drawing.
Both options depend on an ASCII file to associate each text node to a column in the Project
Control Database. This ASCII file is called title_blk_<drawing type>, and should reside in the
project directory.

The following ASCII code will generate the data for a title block that contains the revision
number, revision date, revised by, checked by, and the revision description for the current
revision and the five previous revisions. This ASCII file will also automatically generate the
drawing title, the initials of the person who approved the drawing, the approval date, the project
number, and the drawing number.
If the drawing revision date is to be loaded into the title block, it will be displayed in the
format defined for the Project Seed File through Project Data Manager.

! Sample ascii file for automatic title block generation

!
! This file needs to be in the project directory in order to be used
! by the title block load process. It should be named
! title_blk_<drawing type>
!
! Format of file:Node, Table, Column, Prefix, Suffix, Revision_number
!
! Node:text node in border file
! Table:pd_table number, or entity number
! Column:column number, or attribute number
! Prefix:hardcoded text prefix to be place before database data string
! Suffix:hardcoded text suffix to be place after database data string
! Revision_number:-nth revision (0 = most recent, -1 = second most recent,
! etc.)
! NOTE:Dates are formatted according to type-63 data. Now modifiable in
! the Project Data Manager.
! Rev
85,125,3, , ,-5
86,125,3, , ,-4
87,125,3, , ,-3
88,125,3, , ,-2
89,125,3, , ,-1
90,125,3, , ,0
! Date
91,125,4, , ,-5
92,125,4, , ,-4
93,125,4, , ,-3
94,125,4, , ,-2
95,125,4, , ,-1
96,125,4, , ,0
! By
97,125,5, , ,-5
98,125,5, , ,-4
99,125,5, , ,-3
100,125,5, , ,-2
101,125,5, , ,-1
102,125,5, , ,0
! Chk
103,125,6, , ,-5
104,125,6, , ,-4
105,125,6, , ,-3
106,125,6, , ,-2
107,125,6, , ,-1
108,125,6, , ,0
! Description
109,125,7, , ,-5
110,125,7, , ,-4
111,125,7, , ,-3
112,125,7, , ,-2
113,125,7, , ,-1
114,125,7, , ,0
!
! Drawing Title

115,121,3, , ,0
! Project No
118,101,2, , ,
! Drawing No
119,121,2, , ,
!Approval 1 Initials
200,125,8,,,0
!Approval 1 Date
201,125,13,,,0
202,125,9,,,0
!Approval 2 Date
203,125,14,,,0
204,125,10,,,0
!Approval 3 Date
205,125,15,,,0
206,125,11,,,0
!Approval 4 Date
207,125,16,,,0
!Supplemental Titleblock data
300,121,25,,,0
301,121,26,,,0
302,121,27,,,0
303,121,28,,,0
304,121,29,,,0
305,121,30,,,0
306,121,31,,,0
307,121,32,,,0
308,121,33,,,0
309,121,34,,,0
The ASCII Text Node Definition File

The ASCII file that defines the text nodes treats any text following an ! in the first column as
documentation, and will ignore it.
The data string query will follow the format N,T,C,P,S,R followed by a carriage return, where:
 N = the text node number. This corresponds to the text node placed in the drawing border.
 T = the PD_table number. This corresponds with pdtable_101 (Project Description Data),
pdtable_121 (Drawing Data), pdtable_122 (Drawing View Data), and pdtable_125 (Drawing
Revision Data).
 C = column or attribute number. This corresponds with a database value within a pdtable.
 P = prefix. This corresponds with user-specified text (up to 128 characters) to precede the
database string. This field is optional, but a comma must be used as a delimiter.
 S = suffix. This corresponds with user-specified text (up to 128 characters) to follow the
database string. This field is optional, but a comma must be used as a delimiter.
 R = the drawing revision number. This corresponds with the revision number data as found
in pdtable_125. This field is optional; if no value is entered, a default 0 for the most current
revision (-1 is the previous revision number) will be used.
The following example defines the drawing number, drawing title, and revision number to be
loaded into text nodes 2, 3, and 5:

2, 121, 2, Drawing Number:,,0

3, 121, 3, Title:,,0
5, 121, 11, ,,0
Although it is acceptable to have a text node in the drawing border without an associated entry
in the ASCII file, an error message will be generated if an entry is found in the ASCII file for
which there is no associated text node.
Automatic Title Block Generation in Create Drawing

The Create Drawing command will generate the title block information automatically if the ASCII
file for the appropriate drawing type resides in the project directory. If the ASCII file does not
exist in the project directory, the automatic title block generation will not be enabled for any
drawing of that type.
Automatic Title Block Generation in Approve Drawing

The Approve Drawing command provides a toggle to explicitly select the option to generate the
title block information. If the ASCII file is found in the project directory, the toggle will be set to
the ON position. If the ASCII file is not found, the toggle will be disabled.
Supplemental Title Block Data
Every drawing has data stored in attributes in the database (pdtable_121). The Supplemental
Title Block Data form lets you add additional attributes that are shown in the Border File. These
attributes can also be revision attributes.
These values are recommended for new attributes when creating a drawing:
Custom_1 character(40) column 25 for block mapping

pdtable_121,
pdtable_121,


pdtable_121,
pdtable_121,
pdtable_121,
pdtable_121,
pdtable_121,
pdtable_121,
Custom_9 integer(date) column 33 for block mapping
pdtable_121,
Custom_10 integer(date) column 34 for block mapping
pdtable_121,
For more information on title block data and text, refer to Automatic Title Block Generation (on
page 21).
Nominal Pipe Diameter Value

There is an option in the Project Administrator module which lets you display nominal piping
diameter values as you wish, for example, inches may be displayed as " or IN.
To define a value:
1. Select Project Administrator from the Plant Design System (PD_Shell) form.
The Project Administrator form displays.
2. Select Project Data Manager from the Project Administrator form.
The Project Data Manager form displays.
3. Select Seed from the Project Data Manager form.
The form displays the various seed files which can be revised/edited to suit your needs.
4. Select Drawing Data - Revise from the available files.
The Project Data Manager - Drawings form displays.
5. Select Graphic Symbology Data from the Project Data Manager - Drawings form.
The Graphic Symbology Data form displays.
6. Change the Field Name for Nominal Piping Diameter parameter and Accept the form.
If needed, this modification can apply to any project drawings you have already created. Just
return to the display of seed files (step 4) and select the Drawing Data - Propagate option. This
will change the NPD field on all existing drawings. For more information on this feature, see the
Project Administrator Reference Guide.

Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters

You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so. During Project Setup,
Project Administrator allows revision of working units used in creating a project. Master units in a
Metric project are meters, with subunits being millimeters; however, the project administrator
can designate master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters. This will
ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.
Next, modify the drawing seed file through MicroStation; select Element, then select
Dimensions, then select Units to activate the Units form.
Set Primary Units to Metric. Set Format to AEC. Set Accuracy to zero (0). Set Label to x1/2'.
Select No Secondary Units.
The Units form with the appropriate settings is shown below.
This will display the dimension units in millimeters with no decimal places. For example, you wiil
see 1927 mm instead of the default 1.927 m or 1927.0 mm.
For more information about working units, please refer to Project Administrator (PD_Project).


SECTION 2
Drawing Management
The Drawing Manager option activates the Drawing Management form. It is used to create and
manipulate drawings and drawing views for an existing model at any point in the design process.
It also provides access to the interactive graphics environment for drawings.
Drawing Manager (on page 31) --- Creates, copies, revises, and deletes drawings, drawing
views, and reports.
Drawing Composition / Annotation --- Activates the interactive graphics environment for
drawings. The Drawing Composition commands create, attach, and modify drawing views. The
Annotation commands place annotation graphics in the drawing.
Update Annotation Labels (on page 237) --- Updates annotation labels without requiring you to
enter the graphics environment.
Vector Hidden Line Manager (on page 239) --- Creates hidden-line-removed graphics for a
specified drawing.
Search Criteria for VHL (on page 249) --- Creates the search criteria used for symbology based
VHL drawing creation.
Plot Manager (on page 281) --- Provides a PDS-specific interface for plotting drawings with a full
display control including manipulation of reference files.
Project Planner (on page 287) --- Creates and revises a Key Plan model file for the project and
creates unassigned drawing views.
Project Setup (on page 305) --- Defines the default creation definitions based on the drawing
type, reference models, drawing size, and drawing scale. Once you have defined a project
setup, the system only includes the default reference models and categories you specify when

Drawing Management
creating a drawing or drawing view. See the Group Workflow section in the Using the Drawing
Management Commands section that follows for information on when to use this command.
Plot Setup Manager (on page 315) --- Creates, revises, and deletes I/Plot Parameter files.
Using the Drawing Management Commands

About Drawing Management
The Drawing Management options allow you to create and revise orthographic production
drawings. They also allow you to create drawing views for these drawings. You can report on
drawing information in the Project Control Database and on model data in specified drawings
and drawing views. You can place annotation labels, create hidden-line-removed model
graphics, and plot a drawing or set of drawings.
When to Use These Commands
You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the reference
model attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics for the drawing
itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These model graphics are
attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing views. You can also create
up to 15 drawing views for each drawing.
Before Using These Commands
Besides the basic project setup which is explained in Chapter 1, there are a few steps that must
be done prior to activating the Drawing Management options in order to use all of the
functionality that they provide.
The Drawing Manager option provides access to the Report - Model Data option which is used
to generate reports from models within a drawing using report definition data. Part of this
definition data is a format file. The format file is not generated interactively within the PDS
environment. A sample format file is provided in the \win32app\ingr\pdreport\sample directory.
The format file is named piping_#.fmt. You should copy this file to the directory you will use for
your report-related files. For more information on reporting and report definition data, refer to
Chapter 4.
Group Workflow
If you decide to use the Project Setup option to define defaults for the drawings and drawing
views that will be created during the project, you should use this command first. It allows you to
define the default creation definitions based on the drawing type, reference models, drawing
size, and drawing scale. Once you have defined the project setup, the system only includes the
default reference categories you have specified when creating a drawing or drawing view. If you
do not use this command, all reference categories are available each time you create a drawing
or drawing view.
There is no particular workflow for the rest of the commands after the first drawing has been
created. Of course, you must create a drawing before a drawing view can be created.

SECTION 3
Drawing Manager
This option activates the Drawing Manager form. It is also activated when the Report - Drawing
Management Data (on page 95) option is selected. This form is used to create, revise, and
delete drawings and drawing views. It is also used to create and revise reports and to specify
approval data for both drawings and reports. The following sections describe the basic
operations involved in creating and modifying drawings, drawing views, and reports.
Create (see "Create Options" on page 32)--- Creates drawings, drawing views, and composite
drawing views. Also creates and composes drawing views and composite drawing views.
Revise (see "Revise Options" on page 72) --- Revises drawing definitions, drawing views,
graphic drawings, and plotplan graphics.
Delete (see "Delete Options" on page 90) --- Deletes drawings and drawing views.
Report - Drawing Management Data (on page 95) --- Creates reports on drawings in the project.
Report - Model Data (see "Report Models Form" on page 97) --- Defines and creates reports of
model data in a specified drawing or drawing view.
Approve Drawing (on page 128) --- Defines the drawing approval data for the production stages
(creation/revision) of a project drawing.
1. Select the Drawing Manager option from the Drawing Management form.
The system activates the Drawing Manager form.
2. Select one of the Drawing Manager options.
OR
Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.

Drawing Manager
Create Options
This option activates the Create Options form. It is used to create and compose drawings,
drawing views, and composite drawing views.
When a Create option is selected, the list of Drawing Types (Standard Note Type 2000) will be
displayed in a scroll list on the right.
For the complete list of delivered drawing types, refer to the Standard Note Library
Listings section in the PDS Reference Data Manager.
The names of the drawing types may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using
the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager.
Create Drawing (on page 33) --- Creates the drawing and specifies the drawing parameters.
Create Drawing Data from ASCII File (see "Create Drawing from ASCII File" on page 35) ---
Creates a drawing view from a user-defined ASCII file.
Copy Drawing (on page 39) --- Copies a selected drawing into the specified directory on the
specified node.
Create Drawing View (on page 43) --- Creates the drawing views for use by the drawing and
defines the parameters necessary to create the drawing view.
Copy Drawing View (on page 53) --- Specifies the data required for copying drawing views from
one drawing to another or within the same drawing.
Create Composite Drawing View (on page 57) --- Creates a composite drawing view and defines
the parameters necessary to create it.
1. Select the Create option from the Drawing Manager form.
The system displays the Create Options form.
2. Select one of the Drawing Manager options.
3. For each of the Create options, the system displays the available drawing types in the
display list.
4. Accept Or Select Option Or Drawing Type.
5. Select the type of drawing to be used from the display list, and select Accept to continue.

Drawing Manager
6. The system displays the create form for the selected option and drawing type.
OR
Create Drawing
This option activates the Create Drawing form. It is used to create a drawing using the drawing
file name and parameters specified.
The seed file for drawing creation is created automatically when you create a project. Refer to
the PDS Project Administrator Reference Database User's Guide for more information on project
creation.
Drawing Number --- Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the drawing
number (short name) of the drawing file to be created.
Special characters such as $ @ - / = # * and a blank space cannot be used to define the drawing
number.
Drawing Name --- Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the long name
of the drawing file to be created.
Default Scale --- Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing scale options.
Select the desired drawing scale value from the list.
English Units - m' m"=n' n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the
model. For example, 1/4"=1' indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the
model.

Drawing Manager
OR
Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model. For
example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model.
Drawing scale values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1201. For the complete list
of delivered drawing scale values, refer to the Standard Note Library Listings section in the PDS
Reference Data Manager.
The drawing scale values may be changed to suit your preferences.This is done using the
Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager.
Drawing Size --- Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing border size
options. Select the desired drawing border size from the list.
English Units
A 8 1/2 X 11
B 11 X 17
C 17 X 22
D 24 X 36
E 34 X 44
F 28 X 40
Metric Units
A0 840mm X 1189mm
A1 595mm X 840mm
A2 420mm X 595mm
A3 297mm X 420mm
A4 210mm X 297mm
Drawing size values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1201. The drawing size
values may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using the Standard Note Library
Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager.
Drawing File Name --- The system fills in the design file name (up to 14 characters total) as the
drawing number with the file extension of .dgn. If the drawing number is greater than 11
characters, it is truncated to allow character space for the file extension. You can modify the
Drawing File Name.
Drawing File Directory --- Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file.
Workstation/Server Name --- Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the
drawing file.
Last Revision Number--- This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This
field cannot be edited by the user.
Revision Number --- Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the
drawing. This field is optional.
Revised By --- Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the
Checked By --- Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the
Revision Description --- Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of
this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.
Supplemental Title Block Data --- Select this button to access the Supplemental Title Block
Data form.
Site ID --- This field specifies which work site owns the model. When creating models from the
master site, the Site ID can be set to any site appearing in pdtable_105. When creating models

Drawing Manager
from a satellite site, the Site ID is automatically set to the value for the satellite site. The master
site can create models for any site. A satellite site can only create models for itself.
1. Select the Create Drawing option and drawing type from the Create Options form.
The system displays the Create Drawing form.
2. Key in the drawing number and name information.
3. Place a data point in the drawing size information fields to display a list of choices. Select
the desired choice from the scroll list.
4. Key in the scale, drawing size, pathname, and network address information.
5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data.
6. Click Supplemental Title Data Block if you want to specify input data into new attributes in
pdtable_121.
7. Select the Site ID for the site to which the drawing will belong.
8. Accept or Reject:
a. Select the defined drawing file parameters and select Accept.
b. Creating Drawing.
The system copies the drawing seed file for the project to the specified drawing design file.
It then clears the fields and the cursor returns to the beginning field.
9. Repeat the above step to define additional drawing files.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the previous form.
Create Drawing from ASCII File

This command activates the Create Drawing with ASCII File form. It is used to create drawings
and optional drawing views from a user-defined ASCII file. You can define as many drawings as
necessary with one ASCII file. You can also define up to 15 drawing views for every drawing.
Drawing views can only be created in conjunction with a drawing. You can select the active
drawing type from a list of drawing types in the drawing management data of the Project Control
Database. You can also submit the process immediately or select delayed batch processing.
This command uses the PDcreate_dwg batch queue for processing.
The batch process returns a mail message which reports any errors that occurred during the
creation process. The message reports any drawings or drawing views that were not created,
and reports the reason the process failed. If an error occurs while creating a drawing view, the
related drawing and drawing views are still created, but you need to use the Create Drawing
View command to create the drawing view in which the error occurred. If a specified reference
model cannot be attached, the drawing view is still created. The system sends you a mail
message indicating which reference models were not attached.

Drawing Manager
The system uses the PDcreate_dwg queue for this command.
Submit Batch Immediately / Delayed Batch Submit Time --- Submits or delays submission of
the job. When the toggle is set to Delayed Batch Submit Time, the system displays time fields
which allow you to delay submission until a more convenient time.
ASCII File Name --- Key in the name of the ASCII file to use to create the drawing. This file
contains the information to create the drawing and optional drawing views.
Directory --- Key in the path name where the ASCII file resides.
Network Address --- Key in the network address where the ASCII file resides.
You must create an ASCII file using the following format. Follow the examples on the right of the
colons when you enter the data for your project. From Drawing_Number to Network_Address is
information defining a drawing. Drawing_Number indicates a new drawing. Every drawing view
is associated with the drawing that is defined above it. Each drawing view must be associated
with a drawing. From View_Number to Reference_Models is information defining a drawing
view. You can define multiple drawings and drawing views with one ASCII file.
Precede all comments with an exclamation mark (!), as shown below.

Drawing Manager
Site_ID:HUNTSVILLE
Drawing_Number:00ascii02
Drawing_Name: ASCII Creation
!Each drawing name specifies a new drawing and each
!drawing view specified between two drawing-name fields
!is related to the proceeding drawing name.
Default_Scale:3/8"=1'
Drawing_Size:1
File_Spec:draw005.dgn
Path_Name:c:
ewpipe\
Network_Address:deason
!Next line begins drawing view definition
View_Number:d0005
View_Name:Plan
!This drawing view is associated with the 00ascii02
!ASCII Creation drawing.
View_Scale:3/8"=1'
Orientation:1
Easting_Low:1358:0
Northing_Low:415:0
Elevation_Low:9:11
Easting_High:1376:0
Northing_High:433:0
Elevation_High:27:11
Composition_Point:5
Reference_Models:bcpipe01,38pip01,39pipe01
Site_ID: - An optional value for the site ID. If no value is specified, the site ID will be the same
as the project site ID set in pdtable_101. If the project does not belong to a site, the site ID is set
to NULL. This setting is case sensitive.
Drawing_Number: --- Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the drawing
number (short name) of the drawing file to be created, use lower case letters only. Special
characters such as $ - / = # * and a blank space cannot be used to define the drawing number.
Drawing_Name: --- Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the long name
of the drawing file to be created. This information is optional.
Default_Scale: --- Key in the drawing scale. If a value is not specified, the default scale is used.
Drawing_Size: --- Key in a standard note value for the border size. Refer to the Drawing Plot
Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on the drawing border
reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. The standard note value and not the
standard note text must be used in this field. This value can be found in Standard Note 1202.
File_Spec: --- Key in the drawing design file name, use lower case letters. Be sure to include
the .dgn extension.
Path_Name: --- Key in the path name where the drawing design file resides. If a value is not
specified or a keyword missing, the system will use the data specified in the Project Setup
command.
Network_Address: --- Key in the network address where the drawing design file resides. If a
value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system uses the data specified in the Project
Setup command.
View_Number: --- Key in a drawing view number for this drawing.
View_Name: --- Key in the drawing view name for this drawing view.

Drawing Manager
View_Scale: --- Key in the view scale. If a value is not specified or the keyword is missing, the
default scale for the drawing is used.
Orientation: --- Key in the standard note value for the orientation. Do not use the standard note
text in this field. This value is defined in Standard Note 1620.
Easting_Low:, Northing_Low:, and Elevation_Low --- Key in the absolute Easting, Northing,
and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X' X". (You can use a
negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
The values for the volume coordinates may be in any format that MicroStation will accept
for keyed-in dimension data. For example, the value for two feet, six and one half inches may be
expressed as 0:30.5, 2'6.5", 2:6 1/2, 2:6.5, 30.5", or 2.55'.
Easting_High:, Northing_High:, and Elevation_High --- Key in the absolute Easting, Northing,
and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be
diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
Composition Point --- Key in one of the following numerical values that relate to a composition
point. Key in 1 for left-top, 2 for right-top, 3 for left-bottom, 4 for right-bottom, or 5 for center
composition.
Note: This keyword is optional; do not include it within the ASCII file if you do not wish to assign
a value to it.
Reference_Models: --- Key in the reference model numbers as used in the model management
data of the Project Control Database. Separate each model number with a comma. The
maximum line length is 132 characters. End each line that will be followed by another line of
model numbers with a dash (-) to define more reference models. Each drawing created from an
ASCII file must have at least one value for this keyword.
Site_ID: --- An optional value for the site ID. If no value is specified, the site ID will be the same
as the project site ID set in pdtable_101. If the project does not belong to a site, the site ID is set
to NULL.
Other Valid Keywords

You may also include other keywords in the ASCII file to perform specific functions.
 Saved_View: --- This keyword allows you to create drawing views using data from existing
saved views.
The syntax for this keyword is:
Saved_View:model number,saved view name,OPTION
The model number setting specifies the model that contains the saved view. This setting is
case sensitive.The saved view name setting defines the saved view from which to read data
when creating the new drawing view. This setting is not case sensitive. The OPTION setting
specifies whether or not models attached to the source view will also be attached to the
created view. The valid values for this setting are ALL, which attaches all the models, and
NO_ATTACHED, which attaches none of the models. The default setting is ALL.
If any of the clipping coordinates or view orientation are specified in the ASCII file
after the saved_view keyword, those settings override the settings in the saved view.
For example, in the drawing view generated using the following ASCII file, the Easting
coordinate would be 100, and the drawing view orientation would be Top, regardless of the
Easting High and Orientation settings in the saved view.
saved_view:model1,ram1,ALL
Easting_High:100:0
Orientation:1

Drawing Manager
 MD_PROPAGATED and MD_SPARSE --- You may add keywords to the ASCII file that
specify whether "propagated" (including sparse models propagated onto themselves) or just
"sparse" structural models are to be attached to the drawing view. The default is that
drawings will be created with propagated structural models; however, the keywords
MD_PROPAGATED or MD_SPARSE may be included within the drawing view definition
before the REFERENCE_MODELS keyword to specify which type to attach.
The batch process will return a mail message if a sparse model has been
selected within the ACSII file, but has not been defined within the model management data
of the Project Control Database. This could be the result of the following situations:
a. The ModelDraft project in question is not included within the PDS project; this would
mean that structural models were done outside of PDS, and no entries for the sparse
models exist in PD_Table 113.
b. The ModelDraft project in question is included within the PDS project, but no models
have yet been created.
The Create Drawing from ASCII File command will restrict you to creating only
drawing views of the type specified by keyword (propagated or sparse). If no keyword is
used, by default the drawing views will be created using propagated structural models.
 MATCHLINES --- You may also add the keyword MATCHLINES to automatically create
match lines and corresponding coordinate labels during the creation of a drawing view.
If prompted to... Do this:
Keyin Data or Select Key in the file specifications, then set the submit
Option toggle to the desired setting. Select Accept to
create the drawing(s) and drawing view(s) with
the specified ASCII file.
 If an error occurs in creating a drawing view, the drawing to which the view is associated
and any other drawing views for that drawing will be created. In this situation, you must
create the desired drawing view manually.
 If a reference model cannot be attached, an error will be reported to you through the mail
message, and the drawing view will be not be created.
 In order to load title block information after drawing creation by ASCII file, go to the Revise
Drawing form and select Load Title Block.
Copy Drawing
This option is used to copy the information about one drawing so it may be modified for use as
another drawing. Selecting the Copy Drawing option activates the Drawing Type scroll list. The
system then expects you to select a drawing type before further action can be taken.

Drawing Manager
Once a drawing type is selected and accepted, the system will activate the Select Drawing form.
Once a drawing has been selected and accepted, the system displays the Copy Drawing form.
When a drawing is copied, the source drawing will be automatically attached as a

reference file to the destination drawing for the purpose of sharing annotation. Drawing
annotation, revision clouds and triangles, and vector hidden line graphics will not be copied into
the destination drawing.
Drawings with rotated views should not be copied, as it will produce incorrect results.
Select All Views --- Highlights all available views to be copied into the destination drawing.
Clear All Views --- Clears all views so that none are copied into the destination drawing.
Drawing View Data (on page 42) --- Activates the Drawing View Data form. It is used to revise
the definition data for drawing views.
SOURCE DATA
 Project --- Displays the name of the project
 Drawing Type --- Displays the name of the drawing to be copied. If a data point is placed in
this field, the Drawing Type scroll list will be activated so that a different drawing type can be
selected for copying.
 Drawing Number --- Displays the number of the drawing to be copied. If a data point is
placed in this field, the Drawing Number scroll list will be activated so that a different drawing
can be selected for copying.
DESTINATION DATA
 Drawing Type --- Displays the drawing type of the destination drawing. The default will be
the drawing type of the copied drawing. To change the drawing type of the destination
drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possible drawing
types.
 Drawing Number --- Key in the drawing number to represent the destination drawing.
 Drawing Name --- Displays the drawing name of the destination drawing. The name of the
source drawing will remain until another name is keyed into the field.
 Drawing Default Scale --- Displays the drawing scale of the destination drawing. The
default will be the scale of the copied drawing. To change the scale of the destination
drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possible drawing
scales.
 Drawing Default Size --- Displays the drawing size of the destination drawing. The default
will be the size of the copied drawing. To change the size of the destination drawing, place a
data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possible drawing sizes.
 Drawing File Name --- Displays the file name of the destination drawing. The file name of
the source drawing will remain until another file name is keyed into the field.

Drawing Manager
 Drawing File Directory --- Displays the directory path of the destination drawing. The
directory of the source drawing will remain until another directory path is keyed into the field.
 Workstation/Server --- Displays the workstation/server name of the destination drawing.
The workstation/server name of the source drawing will remain until another
workstation/server name is keyed into the field.
You must activate all fields that expect keyed-in data and press <RETURN> in each
one before the entire form can be accepted.

Specify Drawing Place a data point in the Drawing Number
Number field, then key in up to 24 alphanumeric
characters to identify the destination drawing.
Specify Drawing Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to
Name describe the destination drawing.
Specify Design File Key in the file name for the design file.
Name
You must follow the file name
convention of filename.ext, where the file
name cannot exceed 8 characters and is
followed by a period (.) and a 3-character
extension.
Specify Destination Key in the path to the directory in which you
Directory want the file to reside.
Specify Network Key in the network address of the machine in
Address which you want the file to reside.
Specify Drawing Select Drawing View Data to specify and
View Data name the drawing views to be copied into the
destination drawing. This form also allows
you to specify reference models to be copied.

Drawing Manager
Drawing View Data

This option activates the Drawing View Data form. This form allows you to specify the views
that will be copied into the destination drawing. You may change the name and number of the
views being copied into destination drawing, and you may add or remove reference models to or
from specific drawing views.
Select All Views --- This command highlights all displayed views for copying into the destination
drawing.
Clear All Views --- This command prohibits all views in the display list from being copied into
the destination drawing.
Add/Delete Reference Models --- This command allows you to add or remove reference
models to or from specific views as they are copied into the destination drawing.
Attach Model activates a discipline list that allows you to select which disciplines' data will be
copied into the destination drawing view. When a discipline is selected and accepted, the
system prompts you to select the areas that encompass the desired reference models. You may
either select all models within an area (Attach by Area), or you may select specific models within
areas (Select Models).
Detach Model removes the selected model, after confirmation, from the reference model list.
Auto Attach/Verify activates the Pre-Defined/All Disciplines toggle. Depending on the setting
of this toggle, acceptance of this form displays a list of reference models either from all
disciplines, or from only the pre-defined disciplines for that drawing type. You may select
specific reference models from the list by placing a data button on the appropriate models, or
you can automatically select all models by selecting the Select All command.
If prompted Do this:
to...
Enter New View Place data points in the appropriate fields so that you

Drawing Manager
Number and may specify the name and number for the destination
New View views. Highlighted views will be copied; to keep a
Name view from being copied, place a data point on it so
that it will no longer be highlighted.
Views being copied into the destination
drawing must have a unique view name.
Select Select the discipline that contains the area that
Discipline or contains the drawing view to be copied.
Exit
Select Area or Select the area that contains the drawing view to be
Exit copied.
Select Drawing Select a drawing view that contains a model to attach
View (or detach) to the destination drawing view, then
select Accept.
Select Model Select a model to attach (or detach) to the
destination drawing view (or select Select All to
select all models on the list, then select the
appropriate command (Attach Model or Detach
Model).
OR
Select Auto Attach/Verify to get a complete list of
reference models from all disciplines, or from only the
pre-defined disciplines for that drawing type.
Toggle Place a data button on the toggle to change its value
(Pre-Defined/Al to the desired setting.
l) and Accept
Create Drawing View

This option creates a drawing view for an existing drawing. You can specify the drawing view by:
 Using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model,
 Selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used,
or
Setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specified
named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and
defines the orientation.

Drawing Manager
If you plan to use a saved view to define the drawing view, the saved view must be created in
the model before selecting this command.
View Number --- Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view number (short code
- up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing
view number is unique within the project.
View Name --- Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view name (long description
- up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view.
View Scale --- Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list and specify a new
scale value for the drawing view. The default scale value is the same as the value used when
the drawing was created.
Drawing View Volume --- Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for
opposite corner points for the cube in the form X' X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a
westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Place Match Lines / No Match Lines --- Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate
labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or rotated plan
views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The
corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from
the contents of the drawing views.
The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category,
Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the user-defined drawing annotation
category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User.
The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as
are all other coordinate labels.
The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing view's clipping
boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line
spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance
between the match line and the coordinate label.

Drawing Manager
These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately
re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands
are used.
Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all
other coordinate labels will be used.
The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate label's text will be determined on the
basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other
coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology
data for the default coordinate label will be used.
The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify
different values through Project Data Manager:
 level = 1
 color = 0 (white)
 weight = 0
 line style = 0
 Named Item (on page 153) --- Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a
specifically defined named item to create the drawing view.
 Saved View (on page 50) --- Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping
volume of the drawing view.
 Define View Location (on page 50) --- Defines the location of the drawing view within the
drawing border and automatically composes the drawing view.
Although you will not be prompted to define the view location, you should use the Define
View Location command between defining the view parameters and confirming the form.

Specify Drawing View Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to
Number identify the drawing view to be created.
Name describe the drawing view to be created.
Select Drawing View Select one of the seven view orientation
Orientation options from the center of the form.
Specify Clipping Volume Key in the view coordinates to define the
clipping volume. (The system does not have to
have the Low coordinates in the Low field and
the High coordinates in the High field; the
command will work properly as long as the
coordinated entered are diagonally opposed.)
OR
Select the Named Item option to use the data
coordinates and clipping volume of a
specifically defined named item to create the
drawing view.
OR
Select the Saved View option to use a saved
view model to define the orientation and
clipping volume of the drawing view.

Drawing Manager
Accept or Select Other Select Accept to continue.

Options
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline to be used to create the
drawing view, and select Accept to continue.
When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system displays the models for the selected
area. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference models in the chosen area.
Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing
view. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach
all the model files for a specified area or to
Select Models to specify the individual reference
models to be attached.
Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the
drawing view.
The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup
command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults
are set, the system displays all categories.
Named Item
This option activates the Create Drawing View from Named Item form. It is used to define the
data coordinates and clipping volume for a drawing view from a named item.
The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on the Create
Drawing View form.
You must know the item number of the component you are going to use to define the data
coordinates and clipping volume.
Delta Coordinates --- Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits
the named item. When you select a model, its delta coordinates are displayed automatically.You
can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume.

Drawing Manager
diagonally-opposed corners of the cube in the form X' X". (You can use a negative value to
indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Select By Model (see "Named Item by Model" on page 47) --- Uses the data coordinates and
clipping volume of a named item that resides within a selected model. First, you select one of
the Number options, and the system displays the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After
you select a model, its number is displayed and you must enter the item number of component
to use. The system searches the selected model for that component.
Select By Project (see "Named Item by Project" on page 48) --- Uses the data coordinates and
clipping volume of a named item that resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number
option and then enter the item number. The system searches the entire project for that
component.

Specify Component Set the Select By Model/Select By Project
Number toggle to the appropriate setting, then select one
of the Number commands to specify a named
item.
Named Item by Model
Drawing View form.
You must know the item number of the component you are going to use to define the delta
option and then enter the item number. The system will search the entire project for that
component.
Piping Component Number --- Defines the type of named item as a piping component, then
activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the model that
contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then specify the
component number for the specific named item.
Instrument Component Number --- Defines the type of named item as an instrument
component, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the

Drawing Manager
model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then
specify the component number for the specific named item.
Equipment Number --- Defines the type of named item as an equipment item, then activates a
series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the
named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then specify the component
number for the specific named item.
Equipment Number & Nozzle Number --- Defines the type of named item as an equipment
item with a nozzle item, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that
contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you
must then specify the component number for the specific named item.
Select Model --- Changes the model after one has already been selected through one of the
Number options.
the named item. When the named item has been defined, its delta coordinates are displayed
automatically. You can then change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed
clipping volume.
the first corner point for the cube in the form X' X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a
Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point
for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.

Select Area or Exit Select the area that contains the model that contains
the named item, and select Accept.
Select Model or Exit Select the model that contains the named item, and
select Accept.
Specify Component Place a data point in the field left of the model-name
Number display field, key in the appropriate item number for
the component in the model and select and press
<Enter>.
For an Equipment Number & Nozzle Number entry, enter the equipment number followed
by a slash (/) and then the nozzle number, for instance, equipnum/nozzlenum.
Named Item by Project

This option selects a named item from any of the models in the project to define the delta
coordinates and clipping volume for the drawing view.
Drawing View form.

Drawing Manager
the Number options, the system will display the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After
to use. The system will search the selected model for that component.
Piping Component Number --- Defines the type of named item as a piping component.
component.
Equipment Number --- Defines the type of named item as an equipment item.
item with a nozzle item.
the named item. When you select a model, its delta coordinates are displayed automatically.
You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume.

Specify Component Place a data point in the field and key in the
Number appropriate item number to specify either the
Piping Component Number, Instrument
Component Number, Equipment Number, or
Equipment Number & Nozzle Number for the
named item in the project.

Drawing Manager
by a slash (/).
Saved View
This option creates a drawing view using a model saved view to define the orientation, clipping
volume, and reference model inclusion. Reference models are not filtered on the basis of the
discipline defined using the Project Setup command but instead, are available regardless of their
discipline if they are in the saved view.
When creating a drawing view using a model view that was saved prior to this enhancement, the
Saved Model View command attaches the reference models active at the time the drawing view
is created. Otherwise, it attaches the reference models associated with the model at the time the
saved model view was created. You can revise the reference model attachments.
Drawing View form.
A saved view must have been defined while working in one of the PDS 3D-Modeling tasks.

Select Discipline Select the discipline containing the model with the
or Exit saved view, and select Accept.
Select Area or Select the area containing the model with the saved
Exit view, and select Accept.
Select Model Select the model for the drawing view to be created,
and select Accept.
Select Saved Select the saved view name for the drawing view to be
View created, and select Accept.
Define View Location

This option activates the Define View Location form. It is used to define the location of a
drawing view relative to the cutting edge of the drawing border and composes it automatically.
The distance between the drawing view border and the drawing border is specified in the

Drawing Manager
drawplotsize file and is defined by the size of the drawing. Refer to the "Drawing Plot Size
Table" section in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information.
Drawing View form.
Upper Left --- Defines the drawing view location in the upper left quadrant of the drawing view
border.
Upper Right --- Defines the drawing view location in the upper right quadrant of the drawing
view border.
Center --- Defines the drawing view location in the center of the drawing view border.
Lower Left --- Defines the drawing view location in the lower left quadrant of the drawing view
border.
Lower Right --- Defines the drawing view location in the lower right quadrant of the drawing
view border.
x1 --- Displays the x1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the
value of X-l as described in the first discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.
y1 --- Displays the y1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the
value of Y-t as described in the first discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.
value of X-r as described in the first discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.
y2 --- Displays the y2 distance from the drawing view border. Displays the x2 distance from the
drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-b as described in the first
discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.

Specify Drawing View Place a data point on the button representing
Location the quadrant where the drawing should be
placed.

SECTION 4
Copy Drawing View
This option activates the Copy Drawing View form. It is used to copy an existing drawing view
for the same or a different drawing. This option also allows composite drawing views to be
copied.
When a drawing view of one drawing type is copied into a drawing of a different drawing
type, this command will attach the disciplines as specified for the destination drawing type in
Project Setup Manager.
Do not copy rotated views, since the drawing orientation is not stored in the database.
If you do copy a rotated view, the resulting view will not be rotated. Isometric views can be
copied, so this warning does not apply to them.
Source Data
 Drawing Type --- Displays the discipline of the drawing selected.
 Drawing Number --- Displays the drawing number selected.
 View Number --- Select a view number from a list of existing drawing views for the selected
drawing.
Destination Data
 Drawing Number --- Select the drawing number from a list of existing drawing which will
receive the new drawing view.
 Drawing View Number --- Key in the drawing view number (up to 24 characters) for the
drawing view to be created.
 Drawing View Name --- Key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for the new
drawing view.
 Drawing View Scale --- Select a scale value from the drawing view scale.
Composition Options
 Define Location --- Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border
and composes the drawing view automatically.
 Do Not Compose --- Attaches the view to the drawing, but does not compose it. The view
will not be displayed in graphics.

Drawing Manager
 Compose Coincident --- Defines the composition point of the destination drawing view to
be the same as the source drawing view, when the drawing view is being copied from a
different drawing. Therefore, the drawing view will have the same location in the destination
drawing as in the source drawing. If the composition point for the source drawing is not
defined, this option is not active.
This allows drawing annotation to be shared using the Overlay Drawing Annotation option.
See Overlay Drawing (on page 207) for more information.
 Place Match Lines / No Match Lines --- Places match lines and the corresponding
coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or
rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing
view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the
side away from the contents of the drawing views.
 The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category,
Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the user-defined drawing
annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines
by User.
 The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels
category, as are all other coordinate labels.
 The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing view's clipping
boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control
Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager
will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label.
 These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be
appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move
Drawing View commands are used.
 Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for
all other coordinate labels will be used.
 The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate label's text will be determined
on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for
any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the
graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used.
 level = 1
 weight = 0
 line style = 0
Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number of the
drawing view to be copied.
Specify Drawing View Place a data point in the Drawing View
Number Number: field and key in the drawing view
number (up to 24 characters) for the drawing
view to be created.
The view number must be unique within
the project. If you key in a number currently in

Drawing Manager
use, the system will display an error message

informing you that the view number is not
unique.
Specify Drawing View Place a data point in the Drawing View Name:
Name field and key in the drawing view name (up to
40 characters) for the new drawing view.
Accept to Copy Select Accept to copy the drawing view.
Drawing View
Attach Models to Drawing Views

This option activates the Attach Models to Drawing Views form, which allows you to attach
multiple models to multiple drawing views as a batch process.
Add Models - Allows you to select the models that you want to attach to selected drawing
views.
Add Views - Allows you to select the drawing views to which you want to attach models.
Remove Selected - Removes selected models or drawing views from the corresponding
selection list.
Submit Immediately / Submission is Delayed - Specifies when the models will be attached to
the drawing views. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display
for you to specify the date and time that the attachment process will run.
1. Select the Attach Models to Drawing Views option from the Revise Options form.
The system displays the Attach Models to Drawing Views form.

Drawing Manager
2. Select Option.
Click Add Models to select the models to attach.
3. Select Discipline.
Select the discipline for the models you want to attach, and select Accept.
4. Accept or Select Area.
Select the area for the models you want to attach, and click Accept.
5. Select Model.
Select the model or models that you want to attach, and click Accept.
Note that the models already in the selection set will be displayed as selected. De-selecting
them now will remove them from the selection set.
6. Click Cancel to close the model selection form.
7. Select another discipline, click Accept, and then repeat steps 4-6.
- OR -
Click Cancel to return to the main Attach Models to Drawing Views form.
8. Click Add Views to select the drawing views to select the drawing views to which you want
to attach the models.
9. Select Drawing Type.
Select the drawing type for the drawing view to which you want to attach the models, and
click Accept.
10. Select Drawing.
Select the drawing or drawings for the drawing views to which you want to attach the
models, and click Accept.
Note that the drawings for which drawing views are already in the selection set will be
displayed as selected. You can accept the drawings if you want to revise the drawing view
selection or select other drawings for the drawing views you want to add to the selection set.
11. Select Drawing View.
Select the drawing view or views to which you want to attach the models, and click Accept.
Note that the drawing views already in the selection set will be displayed as selected.
De-selecting them now will remove them from the selection set.
12. Select another drawing type, click Accept, and then repeat steps 10-11.
- OR -
Click Cancel to return to the main Attach Models to Drawing Views form.
13. Specify whether the model attachment process is to be run now (Submit Immediately) or
later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and
time that the process is to be run.
14. Click Accept to attach the selected models to the selected drawing views.

Drawing Manager
Create Composite Drawing View

This command activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. It is used to create a
composite view and attach reference model files to individual drawing views within the
composite drawing view.
The composite drawing view is the composite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is the
composite volume of those views. You can define each of the individual views by:
 Setting the Clipping Volume to define a drawing view as a specific clipping volume (cube) in
the model design file.
 Specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved view
definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
For either of the above options, you can specify the active category data for the drawing view.
Orientation --- Select one of the seven options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing
view.
 The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match
Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the user-defined drawing annotation category
that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User.
 The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category,
as are all other coordinate labels.
boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A
line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the
distance between the match line and the coordinate label.
 These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately
re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View
commands are used.
 Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all

Drawing Manager
 The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate label's text will be determined on
the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other
coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic
symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used.
 level = 1
 weight = 0
 line style = 0
Create Composite Drawing View --- Define Views (on page 60) --- Defines, revises, or rejects
drawing views for the composite drawing view.
Define View Location (on page 50) --- Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the
drawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically.
Composite View Number --- Key in the composite drawing view number (short name - up to 24
characters) for the composite drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the number is
unique within the project.
Composite View Name --- Key in the view name (long description - up to 40 characters)
associated with the specified composite drawing view.
Composite View Scale --- The scale value specified when the drawing was created is
automatically filled in. Select the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the
available scale values to change the scale to be used for the composite drawing view.

Number identify the composite drawing view to be
created.
Name describe the composite drawing view to be
created.
Select Individual Views Select Define Views to define, revise, or
reject drawing views for the composite
drawing view.
THEN
Select Accept for all of the specified views
for the composite drawing view to be
created.
Accept or Select Another Select the Define View Location option to
Option pre-define the location of the drawing view
within the drawing border and have the
drawing view composed automatically.
THEN
Select Accept for all of the specified views for
the composite drawing view to be created.

Drawing Manager
Select Area or Exit Select the area to attach to the drawing view
or the area that contains the models to be
attached.
Set the toggle to Attach by Area to
attach all the model files for a specified area
or to Select Models to specify the individual
reference models to be attached.
drawing view.
The system uses the default model
data categories defined using the Project
Setup command to determine which
categories will be displayed in the models
selected. If no defaults are set, the system
displays all categories.
1. Select Create Composite Drawing View.
2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Types list, and Accept.
3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and Accept.
The system activates the Create Composite Drawing View form.
4. Select the Composite View Number field and key in the number (up to 24 alphanumeric
characters). The system verifies that the number is unique within the project.
5. Select the Composite View Name field and key in the name (up to 40 characters).
6. Select the Composite View Scale field. Select a value from the displayed list, and Accept.
7. Select one of the Orientation options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing view.

Drawing Manager
Create Composite Drawing View --- Define Views

This option activates the Drawing Views field. It is used to define, revise, or reject individual
Create Composite Drawing View --- Saved View (on page 61) --- Defines the clipping volume for
a drawing view using a model saved view.
Reject View --- Deletes the view from the selected composite drawing view.
For more information, refer to: Create Composite Drawing Views Example (on page 63).
Drawing Views --- Displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a drawing view
volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field. You may
define up to ten views.
Drawing View Volume --- Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for
Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for
the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.

Specify Clipping Volume Specify the Drawing View Volume coordinates as
follows to define the individual drawing views for
the composite drawing view.
Key in each coordinate individually or select the
Saved View option to use a model saved view to
define the clipping volume for a drawing view.
OR
Select a drawing view and select the Reject View
to delete the view from the selected composite
drawing view.

Drawing Manager
Accept or Select Another Select Accept for all of the view definitions.
Option
When this form is accepted, the system creates the composite drawing view in the
database. The center of the MicroStation reference file attachment for the first saved model view
definition specified is used to position the composite drawing view during drawing composition.
The system determines the location of the remaining reference file attachments for the
corresponding saved model view definitions relative to the first reference file attachment. The
categories of data displayed and plotted in each of the drawing views is determined from the
corresponding saved model view definitions used to define the viewing direction and the clipping
limits.
Create Composite Drawing View --- Saved View

The Saved View option is used to specify a model saved view to define the clipping volume of a
drawing view that is being added to a composite drawing view.
You can create as many as ten drawing views, and the Drawing Views field is updated as each
view is created.
The composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation must be specified.

Select Discipline or Select the discipline for the composite drawing view
Exit to be created, and select Accept.
Select Area or Exit Select the area for the composite drawing view to be
created, and select Accept.
Select Model Select the model for the composite drawing view to
be created, and select Accept.
The system uses the default model data
categories defined using the Project Setup command
to determine which categories will be displayed in the
models selected. If no defaults are set, the system
displays the categories that are active in the selected
models.
Select Saved Model Select the saved view name to be used to define the

Drawing Manager
View clipping volume of the composite drawing view, and

select Accept.

Drawing Manager
Create Composite Drawing Views Example

You can create a composite drawing view and attach reference model files to individual drawing
views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is the composite of up to
ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views.
You'll want to do this when, for example, the model looks like this:
And this is how you want the drawing file to look:

Drawing Manager
 Before you create the composite drawing view, you'll need to know the coordinates for all
volumes to be used.
 Write down two sets of coordinates (low and high) for each volume. These will define the
absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the two corner points for the
volume. The second point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. (You can use
a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
 The individual views can overlap each other.
Create composite drawing view name and number:

2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Type list, and Accept.

Drawing Manager
3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and Accept.
6. Select the Composite View Scale field, and then select a value from the displayed list, and
Accept.
Define the views to be used in the composite drawing view:

1. Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite drawing
view.
You can define the views in one of two ways:

Drawing Manager
 By specifying the volumes of the drawing views in the model design file (as specified in
the earlier example). When you do this, you are specifying the clipping volume.
 By specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved
view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
To define the views by specifying the clipping volume:

1. Key in all six coordinate values in the Drawing View Volume field for the first drawing view
to be used in the composite drawing view, and then Accept.
2. Key in coordinate values for each drawing view to be used in the composite drawing view,
then Accept. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing view.
The Drawing Views field displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time
a drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this
field.
3. After all of the drawing views are defined, exit the form.
4. Confirm the form that appears, and the system updates the database.
To define the views by specifying a saved view:
The saved views must already exist.

1. Select Saved View.
2. Select the discipline of the drawing view to be added, and Accept.
3. Select the area that contains the saved view, and Accept.
4. Select the model with the saved view to be used, and Accept.
5. Select the saved view to be used to define the clipping volume of the drawing view, and
Accept.
6. Continue to define the additional saved views that are to be used in the composite drawing
view, then Accept. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing
view.

Drawing Manager
field.
7. After all of the drawing views are defined, Accept the form.
The system updates the database.
8. Exit the form that appears.
Attach the drawing view models, and complete the composite drawing view:
1. Select the discipline and Accept.
2. Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to be
attached (or toggle Select Models to Select Area to attach all models in that area), then
Accept.
3. If you did not toggle to Select Area, select the model to be used to attach the drawing view,
then Accept.
4. If there are more reference files to attach, continue this same process. Otherwise, exit.

Drawing Manager
Revise Revision
The Revise Revision form is used to revise existing drawing revisions.
Drawing Number - This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user.
Drawing Name - This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user.
Completion Status - This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user.
Default Scale - This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user.
PDS Revision Numbers - This field displays the existing revision numbers for the drawing.
Select a revision from the list to display information about that revision.
Current Revision Number - Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of
the drawing. This field is optional.
Revised By - Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the
drawing. You can also key in the date in the corresponding Date field. The Revised By field is
optional.
Checked By - Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the
drawing. You can also key in the date in the corresponding Date field. The Checked By field is
optional.
Approved By (1-4) - Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who
approved the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Approved By fields are
optional.
Note that this option eliminates the need to use the Approve Drawing form. However, the
Approve Drawing form is still available as well.
Revision Description - Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of this
revision of the drawing. This field is optional.
Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block - Set this toggle to Load Title Block if you want
the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawing is approved. If you
select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this information to the title block when the
drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command.

Drawing Manager
1. Select the Revise Revision option from the Revise Options form.
The system displays the Drawing Types.
2. Accept or Select Option or Drawing Type - Select a drawing type from the display list, and
select Accept.
The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings defined for
the project.
3. Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept.
The system displays the Revise Revision form with the current attribute values for the
specified drawing.
4. Select Attribute for Revision - Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary
attributes.
5. Accept the drawing revisions.
6. You can select another revision, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Select Drawing
form.

Drawing Manager
Revise Site ID for Drawings

This option allows you to update the Site ID for drawings in the active project.
This option is only available at the master site.
By Project (see "Revise Site ID for Drawings By Project" on page 70) - Displays drawings by
project for Site ID revision.
By Drawing Type (see "Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing Type" on page 71) - Displays
drawings by drawing type for Site ID revision.
By Drawing (see "Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing" on page 72)- Displays individual
drawings for Site ID revision.
Revise Site ID for Drawings By Project

This option allows you to reassign drawings to different work sites by changing the site ID by
project, drawing type, or drawing.
Drawing Number - Lists all the drawings in the active project.
Source Site_ID - Displays the current site to which the drawing belongs.
Destination Site_ID - Specifies the new site to which the drawing will belong.
Change All to Same Site_ID - Allows you to change all drawing in the active project to belong
to the same site.
Specific Drawings
1. Select By Projects from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.
The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays.
2. Select the Destination Site_ID to change.
The Select Site form displays.
3. Select a site.

Drawing Manager
4. Click Accept.
The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays with the new Site ID.
All Drawings in Project
1. Select By Projects from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.
The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays.
2. Click Change All to Same Site_ID.
The Site_ID for All Models field displays.
3. Select the Site_ID for All Drawings field.
4. Select a site.
5. Click Accept.
The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays with all drawings assigned to the new Site
ID.
Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing Type

This option allows you to change the Site ID for drawings of a particular drawing type.
Specific Drawings
1. Select By Drawing Type from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.
2. Select a drawing type.
3. Click Accept.
5. Select a site.
6. Click Accept.
All Drawings of Drawing Type
1. Select By Drawing Type from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.
3. Click Accept.
4. Click Change All to Same Site_ID.
The Site_ID for All Drawings field displays.
5. Select the Site_ID for All Drawings field.
6. Select a site.
7. Click Accept.
The Revise Site_ID for Drawings forms displays with all drawings assigned to the new Site
ID.

Drawing Manager
Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing

This option allows you to change the site ID for individual drawings.
1. Select By Drawing from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.
3. Click Accept.
4. Select a drawing.
5. Click Accept.
7. Select a site.
8. Click Accept.
Revise Options
This command activates the Revise Options form. It is used to revise the database information
for an existing drawing and drawing view and for the drawing file.
Revise Drawing (on page 73) --- Revise drawing attributes.

Revise Drawing View (on page 75) --- Revise drawing view attributes and the drawing file.
Revise Revision (on page 68) --- Revise drawing view attributes and the drawing file.
Revise Site_ID for Drawings (see "Revise Site ID for Drawings" on page 70) --- Revise drawing
view attributes and the drawing file.
Attach Models to Drawing Views (on page 55) - Attaches selected models to selected drawing
views.
1. Select the Revise option from the Drawing Manager form.

Drawing Manager
The system displays the Revise Options form.

2. Select one of the Revise options.
3. For each Revise option, the system displays the available Drawing types (defined in
Standard Note 2000) in a display list.

Select the type of drawing to use from the display list, and select Accept to continue.
The system displays the associated Revise form for the selected drawing type.
OR
Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Manager form.
Revise Drawing
This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to revise the definition of an existing
drawing. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing. First, the
system displays the Drawing Number display list, and it then displays the Revise Drawing form
which revises an existing drawing.

Drawing Manager
Drawing Number --- Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then key in
the new drawing number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the drawing number.
Drawing Name --- Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the
new drawing name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the drawing name.
Drawing File Name - This field is updated automatically when you change the Drawing
Number. You can also place a data point in the field and key in a new drawing file name of up to
14 characters.
Completion Status --- Place a data point in the field and key in a number for the percentage
complete.
Default Scale --- Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from
the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing scale.
Previous Revision Number --- This field displays the current revision number of the drawing.
This field cannot be edited by the user.
Current Revision Number --- Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision
of the drawing. This field is optional.
Revised By --- Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the
drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Revised By field is optional.
Checked By --- Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the
drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Checked By field is optional.
Approved By (1-4) --- Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who
approved the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Approved By fields are
optional.
Note that this option eliminates the need to use the Approve Drawing form. However, the
Approve Drawing form is still available as well.
Revision Description --- Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of
this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.
Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block --- Set this toggle to Load Title Block if you want
the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawing is approved. If you
select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this information to the title block when the
drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command.
Supplemental Title Block Data --- Select this button to display the Supplemental Title Block
Data form.
1. Select the Revise Drawing option from the Revise Options form.
The system displays the Drawing Types.
2. Accept or Select Option or Drawing Type
Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept.
The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings defined for
the project.
3. Select Drawing.
Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept.
The system displays the Revise Drawing form with the current attribute values for the
specified drawing.
4. Select Attribute for Revision.
Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes.
5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data.

Drawing Manager
6. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data button, if you want to specify input data into new
attributes in pdtable_121.
7. Accept the drawing revisions.
The system updates the database, and returns to the Select Drawing form. The form is
updated to reflect the revisions made to the drawing attributes.
8. You can select another drawing, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Options
form.
Revise Drawing View

This option activates the Revise Drawing View form. It is used to revise the definition of an
existing drawing view. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified
drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list as shown on the left.
After a drawing has been selected and confirmed, the system displays the Revise Drawing
View form which revises an existing drawing as shown on the right. This form may be used to
modify the model category data, change the clipping volume and orientation, and define
reference model attachments for a drawing view.
The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to display the drawing
view graphics.
Revise Drawing View Data --- Revises the drawing view attributes. The operator sequence for
this option varies, depending on the view selected. If a composite drawing view is selected, you
can modify each view within the drawing view.
Revise Orientation --- Revises the viewing direction of the drawing view.
Reference Models --- Revises or reviews the reference model attachments.
1. Select Option.
Select the Revise Drawing View option from the Revise Options form.
The system activates the Drawing Types display list.
Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept.
The system displays a list of all the drawings defined for the project.
3. Select Drawing.
Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept.
The system displays a list of the available drawing views for the selected drawing.
Select the View Number to be revised.

Drawing Manager
5. Select the Revise Drawing View Data option to change the drawing view attributes. The
operator sequence for this option varies depending on the view selected. If a composite
drawing view is selected, you can modify each view within the drawing view.
Revise Drawing View Data (on page 76)
Revise Composite Drawing View Data (on page 78)
OR
Select the Revise Orientation option to change the viewing direction of the drawing view.
Revise Orientation (on page 80)
OR
Select the Reference Models option to revise or review the reference model attachments.
Reference Models (on page 81)
Revise Drawing View Data

This option activates the Revise Drawing View Data form. It is used to modify the drawing view
number, name, scale or clipping volume information.
View Number --- Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then key in the
new view number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the view number.
View Name --- Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the new
view name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the view name.
View Scale --- Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the
available scale values to change the current displayed drawing view scale.
English Units - m' m"=n' n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the model.
For example, 1/4"=1' indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the model. The
scale factors are stored in the Standard Note Library.
OR
Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model. For
example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model.
Drawing View Volume --- Place a data point in the field and key in modifications to the clipping
volume for the specified drawing view.
labels when the drawing view is created. The match lines will be placed at the clipping
boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to
each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views.
commands are used.

Drawing Manager
 level = 1
 weight = 0
 line style = 0
1. Select the Revise Drawing View Data option and a drawing view from the Revise Drawing
View form.
The system activates the Revise Drawing View Data form with the current values filled in
for the specified drawing view.
3. Accept the specified revisions.
The system processes the data, and updates the database. When the view scale is revised,
the system revises the scale in the Drawing View Database Table so that any drawing view
scale displayable attribute labels in the drawing for this drawing view can be updated.
If the drawing view is composed, the drawing graphics will be updated.
4. Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
You can revise additional information for the specified view by selecting another option on
the Revise Drawing View form.

Drawing Manager
Revise Composite Drawing View Data

This option activates the Revise Composite Drawing View Data form. It is used to modify the
composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation. You can also modify the clipping
volume by modifying individual drawing views within the composite drawing view.
Redefine Individual Views (on page 79) --- Redefines the individual drawing views within the
Orientation --- Defines the drawing view orientation.
Composite View Number --- Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then
key in the new view number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the composite view
number.
Composite View Name --- Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key
in the new view name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the composite view name.
Composite View Scale --- Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and
select from the available scale values to change the current displayed composite view scale.
1. Select Revise Drawing View Data and a composite drawing view from the Revise Drawing
View form.
The system activates the Revise Drawing View Data form with the current values filled in
for the specified composite drawing view.
3. Select a new drawing view Orientation if necessary.
4. Accept the specified revisions.
OR
Select the Redefine Individual Views option to modify the individual drawing views within
THEN

Drawing Manager
5. Accept all of the specified views for the composite drawing view being revised. The system
revises the composite drawing view in the database and updates the drawing view in the
drawing.
Redefine Individual Views

This option activates the Redefine Individual Views field, which is used to revise individual
views in a composite drawing view.
Saved View --- Uses a saved view model to redefine the orientation and clipping volume of the
drawing view.
Reject View --- Deletes as many of the individual views from the composite drawing view as
specified.
volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field.
Drawing View Volume --- Redefines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates
for the first corner point for the cube in the form X' X". (You can use a negative value to indicate
a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Redefines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner
point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
1. Select the Redefine Individual Views option to modify the individual drawing views within
The system displays the Redefine Individual Views form.
2. Select the drawing view to be revised.
THEN
3. Specify Clipping Volume.
The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to display the
drawing view graphics.
4. Key in all of the Drawing View Volume coordinates as follows to define the individual
OR

Drawing Manager
Select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the clipping volume for a
drawing view.
5. Accept the displayed values to define a view.
The system updates the Drawing Views field with the view information, and clears the
Drawing View Volume block for the next view definition.
6. Select a drawing view and select the Reject View to delete the view from the selected
7. Repeat the steps 2 through 3 to specify the individual clipping volume coordinates to be
used in the next view. You can specify as many as ten views.
8. Accept the displayed clipping volume values for each drawing view, and select Cancel to
exit the Drawing View Volume field.
Revise Orientation
This option activates the Revise Orientation form. It is used to revise the viewing direction for
the active drawing view.
Orientation --- Defines the drawing view orientation with one of the seven standard orientation
buttons.
Rotated View --- Defines the drawing view orientation that does not apply to one of the seven
standard orientations.
The Rotated View option will not work on skewed drawing views.
View Number --- Displays the currently selected view number.
View Name --- Displays the currently selected view name.
1. Select the Revise Orientation option from the Revise Drawing View form to change the
viewing direction of the specified drawing view.
The system activates the Revise Orientation form with the current drawing view data
displayed, and the active orientation for the specified drawing view is highlighted.
2. Select Drawing View Orientation.

Drawing Manager
The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to display the
drawing view graphics.
Select one of the standard orientations to specify the new orientation. Go to Step 4.
OR
Select the Rotated View orientation to display an orientation that does not apply to one of
the seven standard orientations.
The system displays the rotate options.
3. Select the Model Axis and key in the degrees to rotate about that axis.
4. Accept the new orientation.
Following successful completion, the system displays the message Updated Orientation.
Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
You can revise additional information for the specified view by selecting one of the other
options on the Revise Drawing View form.
Reference Models
This option activates the Reference Models form. It is used to copy and attach reference
models and add, remove, and review reference model categories.

Drawing Manager
Display / Snap / Locate --- These toggles set the Display, Snap, and Locate features to either
ON or OFF. These options are only valid for composed drawing views, and they only appear
when a reference model is selected from the list.
Display On / Off controls whether or not the selected reference model(s) will display on the
screen and on plotted drawings.
Snap On / Off controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected reference
model(s).
Locate On / Off controls whether or not the user can copy database information from the
reference model(s) into the active file.
Apply to Active / Discipline / All --- Assigns the Display, Snap, and Locate toggle settings to
either the active drawing view only, or to all drawing views in the same discipline as the active
drawing view, or to all possible drawing views in all disciplines.
Copy From Active Drawing (on page 82) --- Copies reference model attachments from the
drawing view in the active drawing.
Copy From Another Drawing (on page 83) --- Copies reference model attachments from any
drawing view in the project.
Attach Model (on page 85) --- Attaches reference models to a specified drawing view.
Detach Model (on page 87) --- Removes the reference file from a specified drawing view
(deletes the reference model entry in the drawing view table).
Auto Attach/Verify (on page 88) --- Automatically attaches reference files for the active drawing
view, and displays a list of all models in the project that are within the range of the selected
drawing view volume.
Disc/Model Name --- This field displays a list of models that are attached to the selected
drawing view.
1. Select Reference Models from the Revise Drawing View form.
The system displays the Reference Models form.
2. Select one of the options to change the reference model attachments for the selected
drawing view.
Copy From Active Drawing

This option activates the Drawing View Selection form. It is used to copy reference model
attachments from the specified active drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing View
Selection list. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the system then displays the Copy
Drawing View Attachments form which allows you to copy models from the selected drawing
view.

Drawing Manager
Select Another View --- Activates the Drawing View Selection form so that you can select
another view from which to copy reference model attachments.
Drawing View Number --- Displays the drawing view numbers for the active drawing on the
Drawing View Selection form.
Drawing Number --- Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing View Selection form.
Discipline/Model Name --- Displays the discipline and model name of the models available in
the selected drawing view on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
Drawing Number --- Displays the active drawing number on the Copy Drawing View
Attachments form.
Drawing View Number --- Displays the selected drawing view number on the Copy Drawing
View Attachments form.
1. Select the Copy From Active Drawing option from the Reference Models form.
The system displays the Drawing View Selection form with a list of drawing views for
active drawing.
3. Select the drawing view that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and
Accept the drawing view. The system activates the Copy Drawing View Attachments form
with a list of any reference model attachments for the selected drawing view.
4. Select Model.
Select the reference model to copy, and Accept the specified model.
Following successful completion, the system displays the message Drawing View
Attachment Copy Completed.
5. You can select the Select Another View option to reactivate the Drawing View Selection
form to select another view from which to copy reference model attachments.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
Copy From Another Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It allows you to copy reference model
attachments from any drawing view in the project. First, the Drawing Types list displays. After a
drawing type is selected and accepted, the Drawing Selection list displays which allows you to
define models from a specific drawing model.

Drawing Manager
After a drawing is selected and accepted, the Drawing View Selection list displays. After a
drawing view is selected and accepted, the Copy Drawing View Attachments list displays,
which allows you to copy models from the selected drawing views.
Discipline/Model Name --- Displays the discipline and model name of the models available in the
selected drawing view on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
Attachments form.
1. Select the Copy From Another Drawing option from the Reference Models form.
The system displays the Drawing Selection form with a Drawing Types display list.
Select the type of drawing to use, and select Accept.
The system activates the Drawing Selection form with Drawing Number display list.
3. Select Drawing.
Select the drawing to use, and select Accept.

Drawing Manager
The system activates the Drawing View Selection form with a list of drawing views in the
selected drawing.
Select the drawing view that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and
select Accept.
The system activates the Copy Drawing View Attachments form with a Discipline/Model
Name display list of all reference model attachments for the specified drawing view.
5. Select Model.
Select the reference models to be copied, and select Accept.
Following successful completion, the system displays the message Drawing View
Attachment Copy Completed.
6. You can select the Select Another View option to reactivate the Drawing View Selection
form to select another view from which to copy reference model attachments.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
Attach Model
This option activates a Discipline display list. It is used to attach reference models to specified
drawing views.
1. Select the Attach Model option from the Reference Models form.
The system displays the Discipline display list.
2. Select Discipline or Exit.
Select a discipline, and select Accept.
The system displays the Reference Models display list.

Drawing Manager
3. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area, or to
Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached.
THEN
Select the area to attach to the drawing view, or the area that contains the models to attach.
The system attaches all models in the selected area when the toggle is set to Attach by Area.
Go to Step 5.
The system displays a list of models for the drawing view when the toggle is set to Select
Models.
4. Select Model.

Drawing Manager
command to determine which categories are displayed in the models selected. If no defaults
Select the model(s) to attach to the drawing view.
5. Select Accept.
The system updates the database, displays a message indicating that the reference model
is being attached, and returns to the list of areas for another selection.
Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing form.
Detach Model
This option detaches selected reference model attachments from a specified drawing view.
1. Select the Detach Model option from the Reference Models form.
The system activates a list of models for the specified drawing view.
2. Select Model.
Select the reference model(s) to be detached from the active drawing view.
The system highlights the selected reference model(s).
3. Accept or Select Additional Models.
Accept the highlighted reference models as the models to be detached, or select another
model.
The system detaches the selected reference model(s) from the drawing view and updates
the Disc/Model Name display list.
OR
Select Cancel to exit the form or select another option without detaching the reference
model.

Drawing Manager
Auto Attach/Verify
Selecting this option activates the All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle and the
Propagated / Sparse Models toggle.
The All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle is used to automatically attach reference
files to the active drawing view from all disciplines or from pre-defined disciplines. It displays all
the models within the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the active drawing
view.
The Propagated / Sparse Models toggle is only applicable for sites using the ModelDraft
product. This toggle is used to limit the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only
propagated or sparse models in the reference model display list. Propagated and sparse models
cannot be attached simultaneously, unless propagated and sparse graphics are included in the
same model.
When the toggles are set and the form is confirmed, the system displays the Automatic Attach
/ Verify form and highlights the reference models which are already attached. This form is used
to attach additional models.

Drawing Manager
All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines --- The Pre-Defined Disciplines setting filters the
reference models by the discipline defined for the drawing type using the Project Setup
command. The All Disciplines setting displays all reference models in the drawing view volume
selected regardless of the discipline.
Propagated / Sparse Models --- Only applicable for projects using ModelDraft, this toggle limits
the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propagated or sparse models in the reference
model display list. Propagated and sparse models cannot be attached simultaneously, unless
propagated and sparse graphics are included in the same model.
Disc/Model Name --- Displays a list of the currently attached models on the Reference Models
form.
Disc/Area Number --- Displays a list of the available models on the Automatic
Attachment/Verify in either the entire project or that are in the pre-defined disciplines,
depending on the toggle setting.
1. Select the Auto Attach/Verify option from the Reference Models form.
The system activates a Pre-Defined Disciplines and a Propagated Models toggle.
2. Set the Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle to see the filtered or non-filtered list of models, and
set the Propagated Models toggle to see the propagated or sparse models, then select
Accept.
The system activates the Automatic Attachment/Verify form. It also displays the messages
Forming Reference File List and then the message Select Model.
3. Select the models from the displayed reference file list. (Models that are already attached
will already be highlighted.)
4. Accept or Select Additional Models.
Highlight the reference models as the models to be attached and select Accept to continue.
The system displays the message Attaching Reference Model and returns to the Drawing
View Ref Model Attachments form.
OR
Select Cancel to exit the form without attaching the reference model.

Drawing Manager
Delete Options
This option activates the Delete Options form. It is used to delete an existing drawing or
drawing view from the project. When a Delete option is selected, the Drawing Types display list
will activate.
Delete Drawing (on page 91) --- Deletes a drawing.

Delete Drawing View (see "Select Drawing - Delete Drawing View" on page 91) --- Deletes a
drawing view.
1. Select the Delete options from the Drawing Manager form.
The system displays the Delete Options form.
2. Select one of the Delete options.
For each of the Delete options, the system displays the available Drawing Types in the
display list.
4. Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept.
The system displays the associated delete form for the selected drawing type.

Drawing Manager
Delete Drawing
This option displays the Drawing Number display list. It is used to specify a drawing file to be
deleted from the project.
1. Select Delete Drawing and the drawing type to be deleted and select Accept.
The system activates the Delete Drawing form with a Drawing Number display list.
2. Select Drawing.
Select the drawing to be deleted, and select Accept.
The system deletes the drawing in the database and its associated design file and updates
the Delete Drawing form to reflect the current list of drawings for the project.
Delete additional drawings by selecting another drawing.
3. Select Cancel to return to the Delete Options form.
Select Drawing - Delete Drawing View

This option activates the Drawing Number display list.

Drawing Manager
When a drawing is selected and confirmed, the Delete Drawing View form is activated. It is
used to delete a drawing view or composite drawing view.
1. Select Delete Drawing View and select the drawing type of the drawing view to be deleted
and select Accept.
The system activates the Select Drawing form with a Drawing Number display list.
2. Select Drawing.
Select the drawing containing the drawing view(s) to be deleted, and select Accept.
The system activates the Delete Drawing View form with a Drawing View display list.
Select the view to be deleted, and select Accept.
The system deletes the drawing view from the database and updates the Delete Drawing

Drawing Manager
View form to reflect the current drawing view data.

You can delete additional drawing views by selecting another drawing view number.
4. Select Cancel to return to the Delete Options form.
This form displays the selectable drawing views.
Select the drawing view from the Drawing View Number display window.
2. Select Accept.
OR
Select Cancel to return to the previous form.

Drawing Manager

SECTION 5
Report - Drawing Management Data

This option produces a Drawing Management Data Report on all the drawings associated with a
project. It creates a report named drawing_report in the project directory.
1. Select Report - Drawing Management Data from the Drawing Manager form.
2. Creating Drawing Management Data Report.
The system creates the report in the project directory.
Drawing Management Report has been Created.
Sample Report
Drawing Management Data Report
Date : 18-Sep-97
Time : 12:24:06
Project Number : stdeng_o43
Project Name : Standard English
Job Number : 1234
Company Name : Created on 6.2
Plant Name : Intergraph Corporation
Drawing Type:Foundation Location Drawings A
Drawing : 00FD0102 Area 40 Fondation Location Plan 3/8"=1' D
00fd0102.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : 40FL0101 Area 40 Foundation Locations 3/8"=1' D
40fl0101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing Type: Piling Drawings A
Drawing : bctest dssds 3/8"=1' D
bctest.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

Drawing Manager

Drawing Type: Plot Plans A
Drawing : 311 test drawing #311 1/4"=1' D
311.dgn plot1 c:\plot\
Drawing : 311 variation test drawing #311A 1/4"=1' D
311variat.dgn plot2 c:\plot\
Drawing Type: Equipment Arrangement Drawings A
Drawing : drwX drawing 311 from Omaha, NE 3/8"=1' C
drwx.dgn drwmgt c:\draw\user\
Drawing:train.1 Training 1: RLH 3/16"=1' B
train.1.dgn rlh123 c:\rlhcert\dwg\
Drawing : train.2 Training 2: RLH 3/16"=1' B
Drawing : train.3 Training 3: RLH 3/16"=1' B
Drawing : train.X Train 4 3/16"=1' B
train.x.dgn rlh123 c:\rlhcert\dwg\
Drawing Type: Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections & Details A
Drawing : 40PPSD001 Area 40 Title Block Test 3/8"=1' D
40ppsd001.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : 40pd0101 Area 40 Piping Plan 3/8"=1' D
40pd0101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : 40ppsd101 Title Block Test 3/8"=1' D
40ppsd101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : bcdraw test drawings 3/8"=1' E
bcdraw.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : lctest test for symbology 1/4"=1' A
lctest.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : test2 test dwg 1/4"=1' B
test.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : vhl2_0 testing of VHL version 2.0 3/8"=1' D
vhl2_0.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : wwdraw1 Documentation Drawing 3/8"=1' B
wwdraw1.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

Drawing Manager
Report Models Form

This command activates the Report Models form. This form is used to generate reports from the
models within the drawing with the report definition data. This functionality is also used to report
the custom defined drawing management data from attributes in the drawing database. The
Drawing Report Manager stores the report record and location records for each discrimination
data file and format file in the Project Control Database. The numbered records are used to
locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.
Each report is based on only one drawing, with only one view in that drawing. Multiple
drawings can be reported on in batch mode by creating multiple discrimination data sets.
Report Format --- Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create, revise, copy,
or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more information, see Report
Format Form (on page 99).
Report Discrimination Data --- Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you can use to
create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well as the file itself. For
more information, see Discrimination Data Form (on page 102).
Report --- Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and approve
report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form (on page 120).
Report Management Data --- Displays the Report Management Defaults form, which you can
use to create a record in the project control database of the default nodename and path for the
report definition files. This option is primarily used for setup. For more information, see Report
Management Defaults Form (on page 130).
Using the Report Commands

Understanding Report Files and Records
The Drawing Report Manager uses the discrimination data files, format files, and database
records that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all of the
files and records in the reporting process.

Drawing Manager
Format File and Record

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside of
the Drawing Report Manager. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the
report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. Without
the format file(s), Drawing Report Manager reports cannot be processed. A set of basic format
files is delivered for each type of reporting.
Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file so that it
can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the Project Control
Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, the format record
is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report
processing but is not an actual file. A format file can be created to generate drawing
management data and controlled by the user. A sample drawing management format file is
delivered at PDPROJEC\sample\drw_mgt.fmt.
Discrimination Data File and Record
The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It is an
ASCII file that is created interactively using the Drawing Report Manager.
The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and
locate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each
discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same way
that the format record is used to access a format file.
The discrimination data form in Drawing Manager, by default, sets one drawing per
discrimination data file. To run a report on drawing management data on all drawings, create the
discrimination data file in Report Manager. The discrimination data file will allow only piping and
eqp models to be attached. Select any piping model to create the discrimination data file, and
access this discrimination data file when creating the report.
Report Output and Record
The Drawing Report Manager creates a report using the specified format, discrimination, and
search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node.
The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a
report, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is
used for report processing but is not an actual file.)
Group Workflow

Drawing Manager
There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use the Report
Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report definition
files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and path on each
form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default, simply place a
data point in that field and key in the modification.
The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination data
record, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination Data
options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file, and their
corresponding records have been established.
Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.
This form displays the Drawing Number list and is used to select drawing files or drawing views
to be deleted. This form is also used to select drawings to create discrimination data.
Delete Drawing (on page 91) --- Used to select a drawing file to be deleted from the project.
Select Drawing (to delete drawing view) (see "Select Drawing - Delete Drawing View" on page
91) --- Used to select a drawing file to delete a drawing view or composite drawing view.
Select Drawing (to create discrimination data) (see "Select Drawing (Discrimination Data
Creation)" on page 104) --- Used to select a drawing to create discrimination data.
Report Format Form

When you choose the Report Format option from the Report Manager form, the Report
Format form is displayed.
This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the format file
in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a record and
its corresponding ASCII format files.
The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be
displayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the file's
location has been entered into the project control database.

Drawing Manager
Create --- Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add a new
record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format
Creation/Revision Form (on page 100).
Copy --- Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of an existing
format file from the project control database along with the corresponding ASCII format file. For
more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form (on page 100).
Revise --- Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of an existing
format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision
Form (on page 100).
Delete --- Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format file from the
project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reporting cannot be
performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form (on page 101).
Format Creation/Revision Form

When you choose Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Format
Creation/Revision form is displayed.
This form creates or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines the
location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report. Both
the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.
Number --- A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the project
control database used to identify the record of the format file.
Description --- A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.
File Specification --- The file name of the format file to reference.
Path --- The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.
Node --- The node name of the system on which the format file is located. This field retains the
active setting.

Drawing Manager
You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the
PD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file for MTO
reporting is named piping_#.fmt.
1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise.
A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record, go to
Step 3.
2. Select Report Format.
From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.
Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information.
3. Specify Report Format Data.
Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in each field.
Then click Accept.
The project control database is updated.
Format Deletion Form

When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.
This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the
associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination
data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.
Number/Description --- Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description
of a report record in the project control database.
Delete File/Do Not Delete File --- Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set
to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not
Delete File, only the database record is deleted.
From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.
2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept.
The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

Drawing Manager
Discrimination Data Form

When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the
Discrimination Data form is displayed.
This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified
directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or
deleted as needed.
A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a
report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control
database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be
associated with a specific report.
Create --- Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new discrimination
data file. The associated project control database record is also created. For more information,
see Discrimination Data Creation Form (on page 103).
Copy --- Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing data file.
The associated project control database record is also copied. For more information, see
Discrimination Data Revision Form (on page 104).
Revise --- Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies discrimination data.
You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination data file, the location of the
discrmination file, and the associated record in the project control database. For more
information, see The Discrimination Data Revision Form (see "Discrimination Data Revision
Form" on page 104).
Delete --- Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well as its
associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data
Deletion Form (on page 114).

Drawing Manager
Discrimination Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data
Creation form is displayed.
This form creates a discrimination data file in a specified directory. It also creates a
corresponding record in the project control database. In addition, you can use this form to
specify segment and component search criteria.
If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search criteria data
using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using the Report Search Criteria
option takes precedence.
Drawing Number --- The drawing number of the active drawing.
Number --- The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the discrimination
data record in the project control database.
Description --- The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in the
project control database.
File Specification --- The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.
File Path --- The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active settings.
File Node --- The node name of the system on which the discrimination data file is located. This
field retains the active settings.
Select Drawing View --- Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view based on
the active drawing.
Segment Search Criteria --- Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines the segment
search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form
(on page 105).
Component Search Criteria --- Displays the Component Search Criteria form, which defines
the component search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria -
Component Form (on page 109).

Drawing Manager
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Create.

The Discrimination Data Creation form is displayed.
2. Specify Discrimination Data.
In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node.
3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then click
Accept.
After including any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file, be
sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the
discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even though you may have accepted many
of the specifications, however, the discrimination data file is not actually created until you
click Accept on the Report Discrimination Data form.
Select Drawing (Discrimination Data Creation)

This option displays the Drawing Number display list and is used to create discrimination data
files for a specific drawing.
1. Select Drawing.
Select a drawing to create discrimination data..
2. Accept or Select Another Drawing.
Accept the selected drawing or select another drawing from the Drawing Number list.
The Discrimination Data Creation form displays.
3. Select Cancel to return to the Discrimination Data form.
Discrimination Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination
Data Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing discrimination data file. It also copies an existing discrimination
data file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. The
corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed. In
addition, options are provided for you to modify segment and component search criteria data.
If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search criteria data
using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using the Report Search Criteria
option takes precedence.
Drawing Number --- The drawing number of the active drawing.

Drawing Manager
Number --- The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the discrimination
data record in the project control database.
Description --- The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in the
File Specification --- The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.
File Path --- The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active settings.
File Node --- The node name of the system on which the discrimination data file is located. This
Select Drawing View --- Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view based on
the active drawing.
(on page 105).
Delete Views --- Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view based on the active
drawing.
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Copy or Revise.
The Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed.
Accept.
After updating any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file, be
of the specifications, however, the discrimination data file is not actually updated until you
click Accept on the Report Discrimination Data form.
Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form

When you choose Segment Search Criteria or Define Search Criteria, the Search Criteria -
Piping Segment form is displayed.

Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager
This form specifies which segment attributes are to be reported on. The most commonly
reported attributes are available as form options, but you are not restricted to those options. To
display all available attributes, click Other.
When you select an attribute, applicable operator options are displayed along the bottom of the
form.
The combination of these operators with either attribute values or (where applicable) code list
values enables you to fully specify an attribute restriction (for example, fluid code = AC). You
can combine these specifications as needed using the And and Or options, which are displayed
in place of the operator options after you have defined a segment attribute restriction.
When you select a code-listed attribute, the Review Standard Notes form is displayed.
This form provides a list of valid codes for the specified attribute. Simply select a code from the
list and click Accept to continue with the specification.
When you are using this form to copy and/or revise an existing discrimination data file, additional
options are provided for you to insert, remove, or clear search criteria specifications.

Drawing Manager
Piping Segment --- Displays the restricted segment attributes once they have been defined.
Unit Number --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the unit number attribute. Select
an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Fluid Code --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the fluid code attribute. Select an
operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Unit Code --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the unit code attribute. Select an
operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Line Sequence Number --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the line sequence
number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Nominal Piping Diameter --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the nominal piping
diameter attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Piping Materials Class --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the piping materials
class attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Line ID --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the line ID attribute. Select an operator
and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Insulation Purpose --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the insulation purpose
attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Heat Tracing Requirement --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the heat tracing
requirement attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Train Number --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the train number attribute.
Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Construction Status --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the construction status
Approval Status --- Restricts the reported segments by means of the approval status attribute.
Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Other--- Displays a list of all available attributes.
Brief List --- Updates the form to display the attribute options.
Insert Search Definition --- Displays the And and Or options to add search criteria to the
specification.
Remove Search Definition --- Removes a selected line from the defined search criteria. To
remove a line, click RemoveSearch Definition, select the line to be removed, and click Accept.
Clear Search Criteria --- Removes the complete search criteria specification. Select this option
and click Accept to remove the defined set of search criteria.
1. Select Segment Search Criteria.
The Search Criteria - Piping Segment form is displayed.
2. Select Attribute.
Select an attribute to be restricted.
The available operator options are displayed.
3. Select Operator.
Select an operator from the displayed options.
4. For code-listed attributes, select a value from the displayed list and click Accept. For all
other attributes, type an attribute value in the available field.
5. Use the And and Or options to specify additional restrictions as needed. Then click Accept.

Drawing Manager
Search Criteria - Component Form

When you choose Component Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creation form or
from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Component form is
displayed.
This form specifies which component attributes are restricted for the report. The default is no
search criteria (that is, no restrictions --- all component attributes are reported). The most
commonly reported component attributes are available as form options, but you are not
restricted to those options. To display additional attributes, grouped by entity, click Other.

Drawing Manager
Define all the common search criteria such as Commodity Code and Fabrication
Category before selecting the Other option. Once the Other option is selected, the search
criteria should be defined separately for each category, such as Piping Component, Instrument
Component, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support.
form.

Drawing Manager
When you select an entity grouping that includes the attribute you want to restrict, a list of
associated attributes is displayed.
The search criteria defined through the Piping Component, Instrument Component,
Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support buttons will not be displayed as a single list. To see the search
criteria defined through these buttons, select the appropriate button.
Component --- Displays the restricted component attributes once they have been defined.
Commodity Name --- Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity name
attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Commodity Code --- Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity code
Fabrication Category --- Restricts the reported components by means of the fabrication
category attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Component Group Number --- Restricts the reported components by means of the component
group number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the
specification.
Tag/Component Number --- Restricts the reported components by means of the
tag/component number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete
the specification.
Other --- Displays the entity options.
Piping Component --- Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that
are associated with piping components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select
an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the
specification.
Instrument Component --- Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes
that are associated with instruments components. From the displayed list, select an attribute.
Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to
complete the specification.
Piping/Tubing --- Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are
associated with piping or tubing components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then
select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the
specification.
Pipe Support --- Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are
associated with pipe support attributes. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select

Drawing Manager
specification.
Clear ALL Component Search Criteria --- Deletes the restricted component attributes once
they have been defined.
specification.
remove a line, click Remove Search Definition, select the line to be removed, and click
Accept.
1. Select Component Search Criteria.
The Search Criteria - Component form is displayed.
3. Select Operator.

Drawing Manager
Search Criteria - Equipment/Nozzles Form

from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Equipment/Nozzles form
is displayed.
This form specifies which equipment or nozzle attributes are restricted for the report. The default
is no search criteria (that is, no restrictions --- all equipment/nozzle attributes are reported). The
most commonly reported equipment attributes are available as form options, but you are not
criteria should be defined separately for each category.
form.

Drawing Manager
Discrimination Data Deletion Form


Drawing Manager

Search Criteria Data Form

When you select Report Search Criteria from the Report Manager form, the Search Criteria
Data form is displayed.
Use this form to create, copy, revise, or delete report search criteria. Search criteria data
determines and reduces the amount of data reported by restricting the reporting of certain
attributes. Rather than report all data in a model, search criteria specifications narrow the report
to return only data that matches certain criteria.
You can specify search criteria as you create the discrimination data file; the options on the
Search Criteria Data form create the same data as a separate step. If you specify search
criteria data as you create the discrimination data file and by means of the Report Search
Criteria form, the specifications defined using the Report Search Criteria take precedence when
the report is generated.
Create --- Displays the Search Criteria Data Creation form, which adds a new record of a
report search criteria file in the project control database. For more information, see Search
Criteria Data Creation Form (on page 116).
Copy --- Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which copies the record of an
existing report search criteria file from the project control database and copies the
corresponding data file. For more information, see Search Criteria Data Revision Form (on page
117).
Revise --- Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies an existing record
of a report search criteria file in the project control database. For more information, see Search
Criteria Data Revision Form (on page 117).
Delete --- Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report search criteria data file
as well as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see
Search Criteria Deletion Form (on page 118).

Drawing Manager
Search Criteria Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria Data
This form creates a report search criteria data file in a specified directory. It also creates a
corresponding record in the project control database.
If you specify search criteria using both this form and the search criteria options when
you create the discrimination data, the search criteria specified on this form (Search Criteria
Data Creation) takes precedence.
Number --- The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the search criteria
data file record in the project control database.
Description --- The description, up to 40 characters, of the search criteria data file record in the
File Specification --- The file name (up to 14 characters) of the search criteria data file to be
created.
File Path --- The disk location of the search criteria data file. This field retains the active
settings.
File Node --- The node name of the system on which the search criteria data file is located. This
(on page 105).
Revise AND/OR Relation --- Displays a list of And/Or relationships.
Use this list to change the And/Or relationships between piping segment search criteria (table
12, piping segment data) and the search criteria for the component data in table 34, piping
component data; table 50, piping/tubing data; table 67, instrument component data; and table
80, pipe support data.

Drawing Manager
Each category of component search criteria data is related to the piping segment search criteria
by a logical AND or a logical OR. By default, the logical relationship between the piping segment
search criteria and the four categories of component search criteria is AND. This means that
only components that meet the criteria defined for both sets of criteria are reported.
Setting this relationship to OR increases the amount of data reported in that all components that
match either set of criteria are reported.
This is not an exclusive OR. With the OR setting, components that match both (or either)
sets of criteria are reported.
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, click Create.
The Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed.
Accept.
After including any models or search criteria for the search criteria data file, be
of the specifications, however, the search criteria data file is not actually created until you
click Accept on the Search Criteria Data Creation form.
Search Criteria Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria
Data File Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing search criteria data file. It also copies an existing search criteria
corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.
File Specification --- The file name, up to 14 characters, of the search criteria file to be created.
settings.

Drawing Manager
(on page 105).
Define Volume --- Displays the Volume Definition form, which specifies the coordinates of a
design volume cube for reporting. For more information, see the "Define Volume Form" section
in the PDS Report Manager User's Guide.
1. From the Report Search Criteria form, select Copy or Revise.
The Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed, with a list of available data files.
2. From the displayed list, select a data file to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.
4. Select additional options as needed to define the report search criteria data. Then click
Accept.
Search Criteria Deletion Form


Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager
Report Form
When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.
This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holds
specifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description,
and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate a
report.
The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is included in the
format file.
At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the following information:
 Report Output --- The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, and report
node, path, and file name.
 Format --- The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name.
 Discrimination Data --- The report discrimination data number, description, and file location
(network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data is also included:
list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable),
and sorting sequence.
 Search Criteria --- The report search criteria number, description, and file location (node,
path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included:list of model numbers
(with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.
Create --- Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record and generates a
report. For more information, see Report Creation Form (on page 121).
Revise --- Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from an existing or
revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form (on page 122).
Delete --- Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and the
corresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form (on page 124).
Approve --- Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report. For more
information, see Report Approval Form (on page 125).
Multi-Create --- Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiple reports to
the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form (on page 127).

Drawing Manager
Report Creation Form

When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.
Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records are
stored in the project control database, you can use them repeatedly as needed.
Report Number --- The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file
in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name.
Report Title --- The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the
actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the
format file.
Report File Spec --- The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).
Report File Path --- The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active
settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report
Management Data form. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form (on
page 130) .
Report Node --- The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This
field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data
on the Report Management Data form. For more information, see Report Management
Defaults Form (on page 130) .
Report Format File --- The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report.
When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate
format file, and click Accept.
Report Discrimination File --- The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate
the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is
displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.
Report Search Criteria --- The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the
active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed.
Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.
Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification,
click Accept without selecting a file.

Drawing Manager
If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data
defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the
Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the
discrimination data.
Revision Number -- The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.
Last Revision Number --- The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only
field; you cannot edit it.
Revised By --- The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional.
Revision Description --- The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field
is optional.
Print/Delete --- Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the
report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click
on a queue to select it.
Print/Save --- Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report
output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a
queue to select it.
Save --- Saves the report output file without printing the report.
Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed --- Specifies when the report will be processed.
When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display for you to specify the
date and time that the report is to be generated.
1. From the Report form, select Create.
The Report Creation form is displayed.
2. Specify Report Data.
Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file,
discrimination data file, and search criteria data file.
3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be
printed.
4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later
(Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that
the report is to be submitted.
5. Click Accept to save the report file.
Revise Report Form

When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.

Drawing Manager
This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control
database. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without
generating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report output
file without updating the report record.
Report Title --- The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the
actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the
format file.
Report File Spec --- The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).
Report File Path --- The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active
settings.
Report Node --- The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This
Report Format File --- The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report.
When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate
format file, and click Accept.
Report Discrimination File --- The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate
the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is
displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.
Report Search Criteria --- The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the
active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed.
Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.
Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification,
click Accept without selecting a file.
If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data
defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the
Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the
discrimination data.
Revision Number -- The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.
Last Revision Number --- The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only
field; you cannot edit it.
Revised By --- The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional.
Revision Description --- The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field
is optional.
queue to select it.
Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch --- Specifies when the report will be
processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you
to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data --- Specifies revision of the report data only
(Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise Report and
Data). To revise the report specification without updating the report output file, make the

Drawing Manager
necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click Accept. To revise the report
output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report and Data without modifying any of the fields,
and click Accept. To modify both the report file and the report output file, make the necessary
changes, set this toggle to Revise Report and Data, and click Accept.
If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title, this toggle is
automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and the report output file is generated.
1. From the Report form, select Revise.
The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files.
2. Select Report.
From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept.
The fields update to display the selected report file specifications.
3. Revise Report Information.
Update the report record information as needed.
printed.
5. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later
(Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that
the report is to be submitted.
6. Click Accept to save the report file.
Report Deletion Form


Drawing Manager
Report Approval Form

You can now approve drawings directly on the Revise Drawing form. However, the
approval process described below can still be used.
When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.
Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attribute
is set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way for you
to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report is
revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.
Number --- The 24-character unique name (as called short name) of the report record.
Description --- The 40-character description of the report record.
1. From the Report form, select Approve.
The Report Approval form is displayed.
2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept.
The Approval form is displayed.
For more information, see Approval/Revision Interface Form (on page 125).
Approval/Revision Interface Form

The Approval form is displayed as part of the workflow for approving reports. First you specify
the report to be approved on the Report Approval form. When you click Accept, the
Approval/Revision Interface form is displayed.

Drawing Manager
The first time a report is approved, only the Approved By field is active. All other fields are
purely informational. The data displayed in these fields is read from the Revise Reportform.
Report Description --- The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.
Approved By --- The initials (up to five characters) of the person who approved the report.
Revision Number -- The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. This field is
read-only; you cannot edit it.
Revised By --- The initials (up to five characters) of the person who last revised the report. This
field is read-only; you cannot edit it.
Checked By --- The initials (up to five characters) of the person who ran the report with the
revised information. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it.
Revision Description --- Displays a short description of the revision. This field is read-only; you
cannot edit it.
1. On the Report Approval form, click Accept.
The Approval/Revision Interface form is displayed.
2. Specify Approval/Revision Data.
Key in user initials in the Approved By field. Then click Accept.
See Also
Report Approval Form (on page 125)
Revise Report Form (on page 122)

Drawing Manager
Report Multiple Submit Form

When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form is
displayed.
Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.

Number --- The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the
project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name.
Description --- The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.
queue to select it.
Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch --- Specifies when the report will be
processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you
to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create.
The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.
2. Select Reports for Submission.
From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected; select
a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report.
printed.
4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or later
(Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time
that the report is to be submitted.

Drawing Manager
5. Click Accept to submit the reports.
Approve Drawing
You can now use the Approval fields on the Revise Drawing form to approve a drawing
instead of using the Approve Drawing form. However, the Approve Drawingform is still
functional.
This option activates the Approve Drawing form. It is used to input approval details for
drawings and drawing revisions. First, the system displays the Drawing Types display list, as
shown on the left. When a drawing type is selected and confirmed, the list of drawings of this
type will be displayed, as shown on the right.
When a specific drawing is selected and confirmed for approval, the Drawing Approval form is
activated.
This form displays the approval and revision fields which are used to store approval information
about drawings and revisions.
 The Approval Status is automatically not approved when the drawing is revised and the
approval details are not updated.

Drawing Manager
 The first time a drawing is approved only the Approval Initials field is displayed. Once a
drawing has been approved, all of the other revision fields will be displayed.
Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block --- Controls the automatic generation of title block
information for the drawing being approved. The default setting for this toggle is Load Title
Block. The toggle is only active if the ASCII file that defines the text nodes in the title block
resides in the project directory.
Approved By --- Key in the initials of the person who approved the drawing or revision.
Revision Number --- Displays the revision number as specified in the Create Drawing or
Revise Drawing forms.
Last Revision --- Displays the last revision number.
Revised By --- Displays the initials of the person who last revised the drawing.
Checked By --- Displays the initials of the person who checked the revisions performed on the
drawing.
Revision Description --- Displays the short description of the changes to the drawing as
specified in the Create Drawing or Revise Drawing forms.
1. Select the Approve Drawing option from the Drawing Manager form.
The system activates a Drawing Types display list.
Select a drawing type, and select Accept.
The system displays a list of the existing drawings in the selected type.
3. Select Drawing.
4. Select the drawing to be approved, and select Accept.
The system activates the Approval/Revision Interface form.
5. Key in the approval information for the report.
6. Accept the approval information.
The system processes the information and automatically stores the date and time when the
drawing was approved.
7. Drawing Approval Status Updated.
The system returns to the list of drawing views so that you can select another drawing for
approval.
8. Select Cancel to exit the form.

Drawing Manager
Report Management Defaults Form

When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the Report
Management Defaults form is displayed.
This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the
report definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.
Report Path --- Specifies the default path of the report output files.
It is recommended that you not send output reports to your system's temporary (that is,
tmp or temp) directory.
Report Node --- Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output files are
located.
Report Format Path --- Specifies the default path of the format files.
Report Format Node --- Specifies the default node name of the system on which format files
are located.
Report Discrimination Data Path --- Specifies the default path of the discrimination data files.
Report Discrimination Data Node --- Specifies the default node name of the system on which
discrimination data files are located.
Report Search Criteria Data Path --- Specifies the default path of the report search criteria
data files.
Report Search Criteria Data Node --- Specifies the default node name of the system on which
report search criteria data files are located.
1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data.
The Report Management Defaults form is displayed.
2. Accept or Exit.
3. In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report output files,
format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then click Accept.

SECTION 6
Graphics Environment
This section provides information on all of the pull-down menus in the graphics environment with
the exception of the Drawing pull-down menu options.
Drawing (on page 131) --- This pull-down provides access to the Composition and Annotation
options. Each of these options are described in their own chapter.
View (on page 131) --- This pull-down provides view manipulations. All of these commands
result in modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the view of
the model but do not manipulate the actual model.
File (on page 139) --- This pull-down provides basic file manipulation commands, such as
compressing and exiting the file. It also includes commands which allow you to plot drawings or
select another drawing.
Element Commands (on page 147) --- This pull-down provides the Analyze command used to
open the Element Information settings box.
Settings Command (on page 147) --- This pull-down provides the ability to modify rendering,
fonts and colors used during a graphics session.
User Commands (on page 147) --- This pull-down allows you to modify things that apply only to
your system such as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how
various items on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default,
and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.
When entering MicroStation from a Piping model, the Main tool palette is unavailable.
You must enter MicroStation from a different model to use the Main tool palette.
Drawing
These commands allow you to compose and annotate drawings.
Composition (see "Composing Drawings" on page 149) --- Activates the palette of Composition
commands.
Annotation (see "Annotating Drawings" on page 255)--- Activates the palette of Annotation
commands.
View
These commands provide view manipulations. All of these commands result in modifying what is
seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the view of the model but do not
manipulate the actual model. Each pull-down command is detailed in its own section.
Viewing (see "Viewing Commands" on page 134) --- Activates a palette of viewing options.
Viewing, More (see "Viewing, More Commands" on page 135) --- Activates another palette of
viewing options.
Viewing Direction (see "Viewing Directions" on page 137) --- Activates a palette of viewing
direction options that allow for rotation of the view.
View Depth (on page 138) --- Activates a palette of view depth options that change the depth of
the view.

Open/Close --- Lets you open or close a view. The items in the sub-menu are view numbers.
The view numbers that are marked are open.
Bottom-to-Top --- Makes the bottom view fully visible, even if the view is fully obscured before
this item is chosen.
Cascade --- Stacks views in numerical order iwth the lowest numbered view entirely visible and
the title bar of each remaining view visible.
Tile --- Tiles open graphics views.
Swap --- Swaps the screen image between two logical screens. When Swap is chosen, the
physical screens are updated with the contents of the previously hidden logical screen.
This item is dimmed if your system is configured with dual monitors or if it does not support two
virtual screens.
Update --- Updates a view, all of the views, the right or left view or the grid displayed on a view.
Previous --- Lets you view the previous viewing operation.
Next --- Lets you view the next viewing operation. This is only valid after Previous.
Copy --- Copies the content of one view into another specified view.
Camera --- Turns on the camera and defines the camera position and target.
 On turns the camera on.
 Offturns the camera off.
 Set Up turns on and sets up the camera.
 Move Camera moves the camera (like focusing the camera at an object and moving around
to obtain different views of it).
 Move Target moves the target (like standing in one position and pointing the camera at
different objects).
 Lens opens the Camera Lens setting box, which is used to set the angles and focal lenths of
view camera lenses. Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button.
Render --- Renders views in one of the following ways: wiremesh, hidden line, filled hidden line,
constant, smooth, phong, phong stereo, or phong antialias. Also, FlyThrough activates the
FlyThrough Producer setting box, which is used to create simple animations, called sequences,
for visualizing 3D models.

Levels --- Defines which levels are displayed in a view. Changes take effect only if applied with
the Apply button.
Rotation --- Opens the change view rotation box, which is used to control view rotation.
Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button.
See Also
Viewing Options --- PD_Draw (Graphics Environment) (see "Viewing Options" on page 133)
Drawing Categories --- PD_Draw (Graphics Environment) (see "Drawing Categories" on page
16)
Viewing Options
This command activates the Viewing Options form used to update the screen display, set
forms to display on the right or left screen, and set the view control options.
Update Both --- Select to update both the left (back) and right (front) display screens.

Update View --- Select and place a data point in the window view to be updated.
Update Left --- Select to update the left screen only.
Update Right --- Select to update the right screen only.
Copy View --- Copies a selected view display from one window to another.
Swap View --- Changes a selected view from either the right or left screen display.
View On --- Activates eight view options which correspond to the window views (1 - 4) on the
right screen and the window views (5 - 8) on the left screen.
Select the window view to be turned on by placing a data point on the displayed window view
option(s).
View Off --- Select and place a data point in the window view(s) to turn specified view(s) off.
Level Symbology On --- Enables the display of reference models with the active reference
model symbology.
Level Symbology Off --- Disables the display of reference models with the active reference
model symbology.
Reload Reference Symbology --- Reloads the display of reference models with the active
reference model symbology.
Form Right Screen/Form Left Screen --- Sets forms to be automatically displayed on the right
(front) screen or the left (back) screen.

Select Source View Place a data point to identify the drawing view as
the source to be copied.
Select Destination Place a data point to identify the window view(s) to
View(s) receive the copied drawing view.
Viewing Commands
These commands are the basic view modification commands that are available from the View
palette.
Window Center --- Defines a new center point for a window

view.
Window Area --- Defines a window viewing area by two data
points.

Viewing Options --- Sets the screen display and view control
options.
Zoom In --- Changes the magnification to focus on a smaller
display area.
Zoom Out --- Changes the magnification to focus on a larger
display area.
Fit --- Displays all elements in a selected view.
Drawing Categories --- Review or modify the displayed category

data (segregation parameters) associated with a screen view.
Set Reference Categories to Predefined --- Overrides
user-specified reference category selection for that drawing view,
and uses system default reference categories for that drawing
view instead.
Viewing, More Commands

These commands are the basic view modification commands made available by using the View,
More command.
Update Left – Updates the screen display for the left virtual
screen.
Update Right – Updates the screen display for the right virtual
screen.
Update All– Updates the screen display for both left and right
virtual screens.
Update View – Updates the screen display for the selected

window view.

Align View – Aligns two views so that they display the same
volume.
Copy View – Copies one view to another view.
View On – Turns on selected screen views.
View Off – Turns off selected screen views.
View Toggle – Turns On or Off the display of any of the eight

screen views.
Move Up – Moves you (pans) up in the selected view.
Move Down – Moves you (pans) down in the selected view.
Move Left – Moves you (pans) left in the selected view.
Move Right – Moves you (pans) right in the selected view.
Level Symbology On – Displays reference models with the

active reference model symbology.
Level Symbology Off – Disables the display of reference

models with the active reference model symbology.
Weight Display Toggle – Toggles the line weight in the

selected view to 0 or to the weight of the graphic symbology of
the graphics within the view.
Grid On/Off – Toggles the grid on and off in the selected
view.

Viewing Directions
These commands are the basic view modification commands made available by selecting
Viewing Direction.
Rotate View - Element --- Rotates a view to align it with an existing

planar element.
Rotate View - Absolute --- Rotates a view to a specific orientation.
Rotate View - Relative --- Rotates a view counterclockwise about

its center.
Rotate about Z Axis --- Rotates view about the Z axis.
Rotate about X Axis --- Rotates view about the X axis.
Rotate about Y Axis --- Rotates view about the Y axis.
Rotate View by 3 Points --- Rotates a view as specified by data

points.
Match Planar Element --- Rotates a view to align it with an existing

planar element.
Dialog View Rotate --- Activates the MicroStation View Rotation

dialog box.

View Depth
These commands are the basic view modification commands.
Set Active Depth --- Sets the active depth; key in the working unit
value (relative to the current active depth) of displacement.
Set Display Depth --- Specifies the front and back of a range in a
3D view to be displayed along the Z axis.
Set Active Depth - Absolute --- Sets the active depth along the Z
axis for a specified view.
Set Display Depth - Absolute --- Sets the display depth for a
view. Specify the front and back values which are the distances
along the view Z axis from the global origin to the front and back
planes of the desired view cube.
Set Active Depth - Relative --- Sets the display depth for the
active view, where depth is the distance, in working units, to move
the active depth along the Z axis.
Set Display Depth - Relative --- Sets the display depth for a view.
Specify the front and back values which are the relative distance
along the view Z axis from the front and back planes of the
existing view cube to the front and back planes of the desired view
cube.

Show Active Depth --- Displays the active depth for a specified
view.
Show Display Depth --- Shows the display depth for a specified
view.
File
These commands allow you to plot drawings, display the active options, select another drawing
or do a file design.
Plot (on page 139) --- Allows you to select I/Plot parameters files, scale and rotation factors,
active or default categories, the submission time, and the queue used to plot the drawing.
File Design (on page 140) --- Saves the active parameters defined in the current design session.
Exit (on page 140) --- Exits the design file.
Active Options (on page 140) --- Defines the parameters that determine the drawing annotation
modes for precision key-ins, activates the Plant Coordinate System or Design Volume
Coordinate System, and sets connect point mode.
Select Another Drawing (on page 143) --- Exits the active drawing and display a different active
drawing design file without exiting the drawing environment.
Plot
The Plot command activates the Plot Drawing form that allows you to select I/Plot parameters
files, scale and rotation factors, active or default categories, the submission time, and the queue
used to plot the drawing.

Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed --- Set toggle to submit the plot immediately or to
delay submission for a more convenient time.
I/Plot Parameter Files --- Displays the available I/Plot parameter files.
Queues --- Displays the available queues.

Accept to Submit, or Select an I/Plot Parameters file to be
Select Option included with your drawing. If no parameters
file is selected, the drawing will be
processed without one.
Select a queue. If no queue is selected, the
system will use the Default queue.
Toggle from Submit Immediately to
Submission is Delayed to specify the time
to submit the plotted drawing.
Select Accept when all selections have
been made.
This command's Default Pre-defined Drawing Categories toggle is different from the
default setting of the Plot Drawing command in Plot Manager.
File Design
The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the current
design session. This command saves:
 MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes
 PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location of
the Piping Designer base form.
Exit
The Exit command is used to exit graphics and save all changes to the design file. Exiting a
design file does NOT save the active parameters set in the file. To save the active parameters,
you must use the File Design command.
Active Options
This command activates the Active Options form. It is used to control how the active drawing
design graphics look when displayed on the screen. It specifies or changes the defaults for the
Coordinate Label and Name Label orientation, determines connect points, and specifies the
placement location of combination labels.
Modes
Drawing --- Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances for
miscellaneous drawing annotation with Microstation commands in terms of the coordinate
system with respect to the drawing's scale.

For drawing annotation in the Drawing View mode, the following distance key-ins are interpreted
in terms of the drawing scale.
 PXY absolute easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected
coordinate system and the drawing scale.
 This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command.
 PDX delta easting distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing
scale.
 PDY delta northing distance in term's of the selected coordinate system and the drawing
scale.
 PDZ delta elevation distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing
scale.
 PDL delta easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected coordinate
system and the drawing scale.
 PDK a distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale (for use
with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=", e.g. Copy Parallel by
Distance).
This key-in results in a distance key-in being defined to the active command.
The system displays an error message when absolute coordinate key-ins are used with
this option.
Detail --- Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances to define
miscellaneous drawing annotation with Microstation commands for user-created details in terms
of the coordinate system with respect to the user-defined active scale. For instance, you may
place a line where the end points have been specified in terms of the selected coordinate
system relative to a specific drawing.
For drawing annotation in the Detail mode, the following distance key-ins are interpreted in
terms of the selected scale.
 PDX delta X distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale.
 PDY delta Y distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale.
 PDZ delta Z distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale.
 PDL delta X, Y, and Z distances in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected
scale.
 PDK an absolute distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale
(for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=", such as Copy
Parallel by Distance).
 This key-in results in a distance key-in being defined to the active command.
 Drawing View --- Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances to
define miscellaneous drawing annotation in terms of the coordinate system with respect to
the selected drawing view's scale and orientation within the drawing.
 For drawing annotation in the Drawing View mode, the following distance key-ins are
interpreted in terms of the selected drawing view's scale and orientation within the drawing.

 PXY absolute easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected
coordinate system and the active drawing view.
 PDX delta easting distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active
drawing view.
 PDY delta northing distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the "active
drawing view"
 PDZ delta elevation distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active
drawing view.
 PDL delta easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected coordinate
system and the active drawing view.
 PDK a distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active drawing view (for
use with the MicroStation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=", e.g. Copy Parallel
by Distance).
This key-in results in a distance key-in being defined to the active command.
The system displays an error message when absolute coordinate key-ins are used with
this option.
Plant Coordinate System / Design Volume Coordinate System --- If the coordinate toggle is
set to Plant Coordinate System, the Plant Coordinate System is used to define the key-ins. If
coordinate toggle is set to Design Volume Coordinate System, the coordinate system of the
active design volume is used to define the key-ins.
All Connect Points/Nearest Connect Point --- If the toggle is set to All Connect Points, the
system locates the connect points by priority (CP1, CP2, ... ). You can press <R> to move to the
successive connect points. Then press <D> to accept the location. If the toggle is set to Nearest
Connect Point, the system locates the connect point closest to the cursor position when you
pressed <D>.
1. Select the Active Options command from the bar menu.
The system displays the Active Options form with the Drawing mode activated.
2. Select Option.
Select the Detail mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawing annotation
for user-created details in terms of the coordinate system with respect to the user-defined,
active scale.
OR
Select the Drawing View mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawing
annotation in terms of the coordinate system with respect to a specific drawing view's scale.
OR
Leave the Drawing mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawing
annotation in terms the coordinate system with respect to the drawing's scale.
3. Set the coordinate system toggle to Plant Coordinate System to define the key-ins in terms
of the Plant Coordinate System.
OR
Set the coordinate system toggle to Design Volume Coordinate System to define the
key-ins in terms of the coordinate system of the active design volume.

4. Set the connect point toggle to All Connect Points for the system to locate the connect
points by numeric priority (CP1, CP2, ...).
OR
Set the connect point toggle to Nearest Connect Point for the system to locate the connect
point closest to the cursor position when you press <D>.
5. Specify the appropriate placement location for placing a combination label by pressing <D>.
Select Another Drawing

This command activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to exit the active drawing and
activate another drawing in the project without exiting the drawing environment. You can also
exit the current design file and activate a different type drawing design file.
The Drawing Selection (on page 143) form is also used to Copy From Another Drawing and
Copy Another Drawing.
1. Select File>File Options from the main menu bar.
2. Select the Select Another Drawing from the <File Options palette.
The system activates the Drawing Selection form with a list of available drawing types.
Select the type of drawing to be activated, and Accept the selected drawing type.
The system activates a list of drawings for the selected drawing type.
4. Select Drawing.
Select the drawing to be activated, and select Accept.
The system exits the current drawing design file and displays the new active design drawing
without exiting the drawing environment.
Drawing Selection
This form displays a list of available drawing types and is used to Copy From Another Drawing
(on page 83) and to Copy Another Drawing (on page 185).
Select the type of drawing to use, and select Accept.
The system activates a list of drawings for the selected drawing type.
2. Select Drawing.
Select the drawing to use, and select Accept.
The system activates the Drawing View Selection (on page 93) form with a list of drawing
views in the selected drawing.

Drawing Categories
This command activates the Drawing Categories form. This form is used to review, revise, add,
and remove drawing categories for a selected view.
Review/Revise (see "Review/Revise Category" on page 144) --- Reviews and revises the
drawing categories (display levels) displayed in a selected view.
Add (see "Add Category" on page 145) --- Adds drawing categories (display levels) to a selected
view.
Remove (see "Remove Category" on page 146) --- Removes drawing categories (display levels)
from a selected view.
Review/Revise Category
This option reviews and revises the drawing categories (display levels) displayed in a selected
view. This option is activated by default.

Select View Select the view for which you wish to revise/review
categories.
Accept or Select Select the categories to be turned off in the
Category selected view. Categories set ON for display will
be highlighted, and those set to OFF for display
will not be highlighted. Accept the selected
(highlighted) categories.
OR
Select Cancel.
Add Category
This option activates the Add Drawing Categories form. It is used to add drawing categories
for display in a selected view. You can specify that all graphics be turned on for display, or that
only specific categories be turned on.
All Drawing Graphics --- Add all of the drawing graphic categories in the selected view.
Hidden Line Graphics (see "Viewing Hidden Line Graphics" on page 177) --- Add only hidden
line categories for display.

Select Category Select the categories to turn on in the drawing view.
OR
Select the All DrawingGraphics option to turn on all of
the drawing graphic categories in the selected view.
OR
Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to add only
hidden line categories for display.
Select View Place a data point to identify the view to display the
added categories.

Select View or Select another view, or select Restart and select other
Revise categories to be added.
Categories
Remove Category
This option removes the drawing categories that are turned on in a selected view. The
categories are removed (deactivated) by de-highlighting them.
All Drawing Graphics --- Turns off all of the drawing graphic categories in the selected view.
Hidden Line Graphics (see "Viewing Hidden Line Graphics" on page 177) --- Removes only
hidden line categories for display.

Select Category Select the categories to turn off in the drawing view.
OR
Select the All Drawing Graphics option to turn off all
of the drawing graphic categories in a selected view.
OR
Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to remove
only hidden line categories from the display.
Select View Place a data point to identify the view for category
removal.
Select View or Select another view, or select Restart and select more
Revise categories to be removed.
Categories

Element Commands
The Element pull-down provides the Analyze command.
For further information see the Element Commands section of the Piping Design Graphics
(PD_Design) document.
Settings Command
The Settings commands provide the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors used during a
graphics session.
For further information see the Setting Commands section of the Piping Design Graphics
User Commands
The User commands provide access to PDS help and to the user preferences and button
assignments that are specific to your system.
For further information see the User Commands section of the Piping Design Graphics


SECTION 7
Composing Drawings
Composing a drawing means defining the drawing views and placing them in their appropriate
locations within the drawing. This is done using the Drawing Composition / Annotation
command. Selecting this command activates the graphics environment. Several of the
commands in the graphics environment have the same functionality as those found outside the
graphics environment.
These commands are used to create drawings and composite drawing views, create and copy
drawing views, and specify the characteristics necessary to place (compose) drawings.
Additionally, you can attach and detach reference files, and add, remove, and review model
categories.
These commands activate the same forms and functions as those used in the Drawing Manager
non-graphical environment.
Create Drawing View (on page 150) --- Defines the drawing view by
selecting a saved view definition, selecting the orientation and
specifying the clipping volume, or setting the data coordinates and
clipping volume for a specifically defined named item.
Create Composite Drawing View (on page 159) --- Creates a
composite drawing view for a drawing by using multiple saved view
definitions.
Copy Drawing View (on page 169) --- Copies an existing drawing
view to create a new view for the same or another drawing.
Create Section Drawing View (on page 171) --- Creates section lines
for creating a composite drawing view of an elevation view.
Create Composite Plan Drawing View (on page 173) --- Creates a
composite plan view where the drawing view is composed from an
elevation view.
Compose Drawing (on page 176) --- Controls the placement and
characteristics of drawing views (or composite views) within the
drawing border.

Composing Drawings
Create Drawing View

This option creates a drawing view for an existing drawing. You can specify the drawing view by
using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the orientation
and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or by setting the data coordinates
and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifed named item. The saved view
definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and defines the orientation.
are used.
other coordinate lables will be used.

Composing Drawings
 level = 1
 weight = 0
 line style = 0
Saved View (on page 152) --- Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping
Named Item (on page 153) --- Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically
defined named item to create the drawing view.
Define View Location (on page 158) --- Defines the location of the drawing view within the
drawing border and automatically composes the drawing view.
Although you will not be prompted to define the view location, you should use this
command between defining the view parameters and confirming the form.
View Number --- Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view number (short code
- up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing
view number is unique within the project.
View Name --- Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view name (long description
- up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view.
View Scale --- Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list and specify a new
scale value for the drawing view. The default scale value is the same as the value used when
the drawing was created.

Number identify the drawing view to be created.
Name describe the drawing view to be created.
Select Drawing View Select one of the seven view orientation options
Orientation from the center of the form.

Composing Drawings
Specify Clipping Volume Key in the view coordinates to define the

clipping volume. (The system does not have to
have the Low coordinates in the Low field and
the High coordinates in the High field; the
command will work properly as long as the
coordinated entered are diagonally opposed.)
OR
Select the Named Item option to use the data
coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically
defined named item to create the drawing view.
OR
Select the Saved View option to use a saved
view model to define the orientation and clipping
Accept or Select Other Accept the displayed values.
Options
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline to be used to create the
drawing view, and select Accept.
When the toggle is set to Select Models,
the system displays the models for the selected
area. The Attach by Area setting will attach all
reference models in the chosen area.
Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing
view. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach
all the model files for a specified area or to
Select Models to specify the individual
drawing view.
Saved View
This option creates a drawing view using a saved view to define the orientation, clipping volume,
and reference model inclusion. Reference models will not be filtered on the basis of the
discipline defined using the Project Setup command but instead, will be available regardless of
their discipline if they are in the saved view.
When creating a drawing view using a model view that was saved prior to this enhancement, the
Saved Model View command attaches the reference models active at the time the drawing view
is created. Otherwise, the reference models associated with the model at the time the saved
model view was created are attached. You can revise the reference model attachments.

Composing Drawings
Drawing View form.
A saved view must have been defined while working in one of the PDS 3D-Modeling tasks.

Select Discipline Select the discipline containing the model with the
or Exit saved view, and select Accept.
Select Area or Select the area containing the model with the
Exit saved view, and select Accept.
Select Model Select the model for the drawing view to be
Select Saved View Select the saved view name for the drawing view to
be created, and select Accept.
Named Item
This option activates the Create Drawing View from Named Item form. It is used to define the
data coordinates and clipping volume for a drawing view from a named item.
Drawing View form.

Composing Drawings
option and then enter the item number. The system will search the entire project for that
component.

Specify Component Set the Select By Model/Select By Project
Number toggle to the appropriate setting, then select one
of the Number commands to specify a named
item.
Named Item by Model

This toggle setting selects a named item in a specific model to define the delta coordinates and
clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.
Drawing View form.

Composing Drawings
Select by Project --- Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that
resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enter the item
number. The system will search the entire project for that component.
Piping Component Number --- Defines the type of named item as a piping component, then
activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the model that
contains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must then specify the
component number for the specific named item.
component, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the
model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must then
specify the component number for the specific named item.
Equipment Number --- Defines the type of named item as an equipment item, then activates a
series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the
named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must then specify the component
number for the specific named item.
item with a nozzle item, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that
contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you
must then specify the component number for the specific named item.
Select Model --- Changes the model after one has already been selected through one of the
Number options.
the named item. When the named item has been defined, its delta coordinates are displayed
automatically. You can then change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed
clipping volume.
Select Area or Exit Select the area that contains the model that
contains the named item, and select Accept.

Composing Drawings
Select Model or Exit Select the model that contains the named item,
and select Accept.
Specify Component Place a data point in the field left of the
Number model-name display field, key in the appropriate
item number for the component in the model and
select and press <Enter>.
Named Item by Project

This option selects a named item from any of the models in the project to define the delta
coordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.
Drawing View form.
Piping Component Number --- Defines the type of named item as a piping component.
component.
Equipment Number --- Defines the type of named item as an equipment item.
item with a nozzle item.

Composing Drawings

Specify Component Place a data point in the field and key in the
Number appropriate item number to specify either Piping
Component Number, Instrument Component
Number, Equipment Number, or Equipment
Number & Nozzle Number for the named item in
the project.

Composing Drawings
Define View Location

This option activates the Define View Location form. It is used to define the location of a
drawing view relative to the cutting edge of the drawing border and composes it automatically.
The distance between the drawing view border and the drawing border is specified in the
drawplotsize file and is defined by the size of the drawing. Refer to Drawing Plot Size (on page
13).
Drawing View form.
Upper Left --- Defines the drawing view location in the upper left quadrant of the drawing view
border.
Upper Right --- Defines the drawing view location in the upper right quadrant of the drawing
view border.
Center --- Defines the drawing view location in the center of the drawing view border.
Lower Left --- Defines the drawing view location in the lower left quadrant of the drawing view
border.
Lower Right --- Defines the drawing view location in the lower right quadrant of the drawing
view border.
value of X-l as described in the first discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.
y1 --- Displays the y1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the
value of Y-t as described in the first discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.
value of X-r as described in the first discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.
y2 --- Displays the y2 distance from the drawing view border. Displays the x2 distance from the
drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-b as described in the first
discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.

Specify Drawing View Place a data point on the button representing
Location the quadrant where the drawing should be
placed.

Composing Drawings
Create Composite Drawing View

This command activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. It is used to create a
composite view. A composite drawing view is a drawing view which is a composite of several
model views with different clipping volumes. You can define the views in a composite drawing
view by:
 Setting the Clipping Volume to define a drawing view as a specific clipping volume (cube) in
the model design file.
 Specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved view
definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
For either of the above options, you can specify the active category data for the drawing view.
Orientation --- Select one of the seven options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing
view.
are used.

Composing Drawings
 level = 1
 weight = 0
 line style = 0
Define Views for Composite Drawing View --- Defines, revises, or rejects drawing views for
Define View Location --- Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border
and have the drawing view composed automatically.
Composite View Number --- Key in the composite drawing view number (short name - up to 24
characters) for the composite drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the number is
unique within the project.
Composite View Name --- Key in the view name (long description - up to 40 characters)
associated with the specified composite drawing view.
Composite View Scale --- The scale value specified when the drawing was created is
automatically filled in. Select the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the
available scale values to change the scale to be used for the composite drawing view.

Number identify the composite drawing view to be
created.
Name describe the composite drawing view to be
created.
Select Individual Views Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject
drawing views for the composite drawing
view.
THEN
Accept all of the specified views for the
composite drawing view to be created.
Accept or Select Another Select the Define View Location option to
Option pre-define the location of the drawing view
within the drawing border and have the
drawing view composed automatically.
THEN
Accept all of the specified views for the
composite drawing view to be created.
Select Area or Exit Select the area to attach to the drawing

Composing Drawings
viewor the area that contains the models to be

attached.
Set the toggle to Attach by Area to
attach all the model files for a specified area
or to Select Models to specify the individual
drawing view.
2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Types list, and select Accept.
3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and select Accept.
The system activates the Create Composite Drawing View form.
Accept.
See Also
Create Composite Drawing View -Define Views (see "Create Composite Drawing View - Define
Views" on page 161)
Create Composite Drawing View -Saved View (see "Create Composite Drawing View - Saved
View" on page 162)
Create Composite Drawing View - Define Views

This option activates the Drawing Views field. It is used to define, revise, or reject drawing
views for the composite drawing view.
Saved View --- Defines the clipping volume for a drawing view using a model saved view.

Composing Drawings
Reject View --- Deletes the view from the selected composite drawing view.
volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field. You may
define up to ten views.
Drawing View Volume --- Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for
Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for
the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.

Specify Clipping Volume Specify the Drawing View Volume coordinates
as follows to define the individual drawing
views for the composite drawing view.
Key in each coordinate individually or select
the Saved View option to use a model saved
view to define the clipping volume for a
drawing view.
OR
Select a drawing view and select the Reject
View to delete the view from the selected
Accept or Select Another Accept all of the view definitions.
Option
When this form is confirmed, the system creates the composite drawing view in the
database. The center of the MicroStation reference file attachment for the first saved model view
definition specified is used to position the composite drawing view during drawing composition.
The system determines the location of the remaining reference file attachments for the
corresponding saved model view definitions relative to the first reference file attachment. The
categories of data displayed and plotted in each of the drawing views is determined from the
corresponding saved model view definitions used to define the viewing direction and the clipping
limits.
After creating the composite drawing view, the Attach Drawing View Models form is activated
to attach reference models.
Create Composite Drawing View - Saved View

The Saved View option on the Create Composite Drawing View form is used to specify a
model saved view to define the clipping volume of the composite drawing view being created.
You can create as many as ten drawing views, and the Drawing View block is updated as each
view is created.

Composing Drawings
The composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation must be specified on the
Create Composite Drawing View form in Drawing Manager.

Select Discipline Select the discipline for the composite drawing view to
or Exit be created, and select Accept.
Select Area or Select the area for the composite drawing view to be
Exit created, and select Accept.
Select Model Select the model for the composite drawing view to be
The system uses the default model data
categories defined using the Project Setup command to
determine which categories will be displayed in the
models selected. If no defaults are set, the system
displays the categories that are active in the selected
models.
Select Saved Select the saved view name to be used to define the
Model View clipping volume of the composite drawing view, and
Accept the view definition.
Create Composite Drawing Views Example

You can create a composite drawing view and attach reference model files to individual drawing
views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is the composite of up to
ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views.

Composing Drawings
You will want to do this when, for example, the model looks like this:
And this is how you want the drawing file to look.

Composing Drawings
 Before you create the composite drawing view, you'll need to know the coordinates for all
volumes to be used.
 Write down two sets of coordinates (low and high) for each volume. These will define the
absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the two corner points for the
volume. The second point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. (You can use
a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
 The individual views can overlap each other.
Create composite drawing view name and number:

To perform the following steps, the composite drawing view number, name, scale, and
orientation must be specified on the Create Composite Drawing View form in Drawing
Manager.
2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Type list, and confirm.
3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and confirm.
confirm.
Define the views to be used in the composite drawing view:

Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite drawing view.
You can define the views in one of two ways:
 By specifying the volumes of the drawing views in the model design file (as specified in the
earlier example). When you do this, you are specifying the clipping volume.
 By specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved
view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
To define the views by specifying the clipping volume:

1. Key in all six coordinate values in the Drawing View Volume field for the first drawing view
to be used in the composite drawing view, then confirm.
2. Key in coordinate values for each drawing view to be used in the composite drawing view,
then confirm. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing view.
field.
3. After all of the drawing views are defined, exit the form.
4. Accept the form that appears, and the system updates the database.
To define the views by specifying a saved view:

Note that the saved views must already exist.
1. Select Saved View.
2. Select the discipline of the drawing view to be added, and confirm.
3. Select the area that contains the saved view, and confirm.

Composing Drawings
4. Select the model with the saved view to be used, and confirm.
5. Select the saved view to be used to define the clipping volume of the drawing view, and
confirm.
6. Continue to define the additional saved views that are to be used in the composite drawing
view, and then confirm. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing
view.
field.
7. After all of the drawing views are defined, Accept the form.
8. Exit the form that appears.
Attach the drawing view models, and complete the composite drawing view:
1. Select the discipline and Accept.
2. Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to be
attached (or toggle Select Models to Select Area to attach all models in that area), and
then confirm.
3. If you did not toggle to Select Area, select the model to be used to attach the drawing view,
and then confirm.
4. If there are more reference files to attach, continue this same process. Otherwise, exit.

Composing Drawings

SECTION 8
Copy Drawing View

This option activates the Copy Drawing View form. It is used to copy an existing drawing view
for the same or a different drawing. This option also allows composite drawing views to be
copied.
When a drawing view of one drawing type is copied into a drawing of a different drawing
type, this command will attach the disciplines as specified for the destination drawing type in
Project Setup Manager.
Source Data
 Drawing Type --- Displays the discipline of the active drawing. You may select a different
source drawing type by placing a data point in this field.
 Drawing Number --- Displays the active drawing number. You may select a different source
drawing number by placing a data point in this field.
 View Number --- Selecting this field activates a view number display list that prompts you to
select a view number for the specified source drawing.
Destination Data
 Drawing Number --- Select the drawing number from a list of existing drawings which will
receive the new drawing view.
 Drawing View Number --- Key in the drawing view number (up to 24 characters) for the
drawing view to be created.
 Drawing View Name --- Key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for the new
drawing view.
 Drawing View Scale --- Select a scale value from the drawing view scale.
Composition Options
 Define Location --- Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border
and composes the drawing view automatically. Within the graphics environment, this option
is only active when the source and destination view numbers are the same.
 Do Not Compose --- Attaches the view to the drawing, but does not compose it. The view
will not be displayed in graphics.

Copy Drawing View
 Compose Coincident --- Defines the composition point of the destination drawing view to
be the same as the source drawing view, when the drawing view is being copied from a
different drawing. Therefore, the drawing view will have the same location in the destination
drawing as in the source drawing. If the composition point for the source drawing is not
defined, this option is not active.
This allows drawing annotation to be shared using the Overlay Drawing Annotation option.
 Place Match Lines / No Match Lines --- Places match lines and the corresponding
coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or
rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing
view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the
side away from the contents of the drawing views.
 The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category,
Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the user-defined drawing
annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines
by User.
 The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels
category, as are all other coordinate labels.
boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control
Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager
will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label.
 These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be
appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move
Drawing View commands are used.
 Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for
all other coordinate labels will be used.
 The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate label's text will be determined
on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for
any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the
graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used.
The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you
specify different values through Project Data Manager:
 level = 1
 weight = 0
 line style = 0

Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number of the
drawing view to be copied.

Copy Drawing View

Number Number field and key in the drawing view
number (up to 24 characters) for the
drawing view to be created. The view
number must be unique within the project. If
you key in a number currently in use, the
system will display an error message
informing you that the view number is not
unique.
Name Name: field and key in the drawing view
name (up to 40 characters) for the new
drawing view.
Accept to Copy Accept the form and copy the drawing view.
Drawing View
Create Section Drawing View

This command activates the Create Section Drawing View form. It is used to create section
lines for creating a composite drawing view of an elevation view. A fence shape is specified to
define the clipping volume of the section view. You can specify the section drawing view by
using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the orientation
and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or setting the data coordinates and
clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifically defined named item. The saved view
definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and defines the orientation.
the model before selecting this command. See the section describing Saved View.
View Number --- Select and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters)
for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing view number is unique
within the project.
View Name --- Select and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters)
associated with the specified drawing view.

Copy Drawing View
View Scale --- The system displays the scale value defined when the drawing was created. You
can use this scale value, or select the field to activate a scale display list. Then, select a new
scale value for the drawing view to be created.
Drawing View Volume --- Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation
coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X' X". (You can use a negative
value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second
corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
Named Item --- Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined named
item to create the drawing view.
Saved View --- Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume of the
drawing view.

Specify Drawing View Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters
Number to identify this drawing view.
Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters
to describe this drawing view.
Select Drawing View Select one of the five view orientation
Orientation options from the center of the form to
specify the orthographic view.
Specify Clipping Volume Select each of the Drawing View
Volume fields from the center of the
form, and key in the view coordinates to
define the drawing view volume.
OR
Select the Named Item
option to use the data
coordinates and clipping
volume of a specifically
defined named item to
create the drawing view.
OR
Select the Saved View
option to use a saved view
model to define the
orientation and clipping
Accept or Select Other Accept the displayed coordinate values.
Options.
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline to be used to create
the drawing view, and select Accept.
Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the
drawing view.

Copy Drawing View
Set the toggle to Attach by Area

to attach all the model files for a
specified area or to Select Models to
specify the individual reference models
to be attached.
drawing view.
The system uses the default
model data categories defined using the
Project Setup command to determine
which categories will be displayed in the
models selected. If no defaults are set,
the system displays the categories.
Identify Origin Place a data point to identify the origin in
the drawing to compose the section
view. The section view is composed
initially as a plan view.
Identify Fence Point Place a series of data points to specify a
fence shape to define the clipping
volume of the section view. The fence
points are axis locked automatically.
Rectangular coordinates are formed from the fence points and the initial drawing view volume to
form the individual drawing views of the composite drawing view. An error message is displayed
if the number of individual drawing views formed by the fence shape exceeds the maximum
number of drawing views per composite drawing view. A composite drawing view is formed
automatically to define the section view, and the drawing view is re-displayed with the specified
elevation view orientation.
Create Composite Plan Drawing View

This option activates the Create Composite Plan Drawing View form that is used to create
composite plan views where the drawing view is composed from an elevation view.
To specify the section drawing view, you must use a saved view definition created for a screen
view in the model, select the orientation, and specify the clipping volume coordinates to be used.
Alternatively, you can set the data coordinates and clip the volume to create a drawing view for
a specifically defined, named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the
drawing view and defines the orientation.

Copy Drawing View
The saved view must be created in the model before selecting this command. See Saved
View (on page 152).
View Number --- Select and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters)
for the composite plan drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing view
number is unique within the project.
View Name --- Select and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters)
associated with the specified composite plan drawing view.
View Scale --- The system displays the scale value defined when the drawing was created. You
can use this scale value, or select the field to activate a scale display list. Then, select a new
scale value for the drawing view to be created.
Drawing View Volume --- Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation
coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X' X". (You can use a negative
value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second
labels when the drawing view is created. The match lines will be placed at the clipping
boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to
each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views.
commands are used.

Copy Drawing View
 The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate label's text will be determined on
the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other
coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic
symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used.
The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you
specify different values through Project Data Manager:
 level = 1
 weight = 0
 line style = 0

Specify Drawing View Key in up to 6 alphanumeric characters to identify this composite
Number plan drawing view.
Specify Drawing View Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe this composite
Name plan drawing view.
Select Drawing View Select one of the four initial view direction options from the center
Orientation of the form to specify the viewing direction.
Specify Clipping Volume Select each of the fields from the center of the form, and key in the
view coordinates to define the drawing view volume.
OR
Select the Named Item option to use the data coordinates and
clipping volume of a specifically defined named item to create the
drawing view.
OR
Select the Saved View option to use a saved view model to define
the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view.
Accept or Select Other Accept the displayed coordinate values.
Options
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline to be used to create the drawing view, and
select Accept.
Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view. Set the
toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a
specified area or to Select Models to specify the individual
Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view.
The system uses the default model data categories defined
using the Project Setup command to determine which categories
will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the
system displays the categories.
Identify Origin Place a data point to identify the origin in the drawing to compose
the section view. The section view is composed initially as a plan
view.

Copy Drawing View
Identify Fence Points Place a series of data points to specify a fence shape to define the
clipping volume of the section view. The fence points are axis
locked automatically.
Rectangular coordinates are formed from the fence points and the initial drawing view volume to
form the individual drawing views of the composite drawing view. An error message is displayed
if the number of individual drawing views formed by the fence shape exceeds the maximum
number of drawing views per composite drawing view. A composite drawing view is formed
automatically to define the section view, and the drawing view is re-displayed with the specified
elevation view orientation.
Compose Drawing
This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It is used to control the placement and
characteristics of drawing views (or composite drawing views) within the drawing border. You
can place, manipulate, revise and delete the drawing views. It is also used, along with a series
of other forms, to turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics (see
"Viewing Hidden Line Graphics" on page 177) can be viewed in the drawing environment.
 Number --- Displays the number (up to 6 characters) that identifies the drawing view.
 Name --- Displays the name (up to 40 characters) that describes the drawing view.
 Scale --- Displays the scale of the drawing view.
Composed --- Displays the composition status (Yes or No) of the drawing view.
Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display on the
Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected reference
models.
Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information from the
reference models into the active file.
Compose Drawing View (on page 180) --- Select to place the active drawing view within the
drawing border.

Copy Drawing View
Reference Models (on page 182) --- Select to copy reference files, attach and detach models,
add, remove, and review model categories.
Delete Drawing View (on page 192) --- Select and press <D> to accept the highlighted drawing
view for deletion. Press <R> to reject the view and make another selection.
The system deletes the alphanumeric description of the drawing view in the database files and
deletes the drawing composition graphics for the drawing view from the drawing. It also
detaches the reference file attachments for the drawing view.
Align Drawing View (on page 192) --- Select to align two existing (composed) drawing views.
Revise View Data (on page 194) --- Select to revise the clipping volume and scale data of the
active drawing view (or composite drawing view).
Revise Orientation (on page 196) --- Select to change the viewing direction of the active drawing
view (or composite drawing view).
Unassigned Views (on page 197) --- Select to activate a list of unassigned views from which you
can choose a view to be composed.
Volume Graphics (see "Area Volume Graphics" on page 198) - Select to display clash and
design area volumes as graphical blocks in the drawing.

Select Drawing Select the appropriate drawing view number from the
View list of drawing views.
Select Options Set toggle locks (only valid for composed drawing
views) to on or off, and then select any other
appropriate option.
Viewing Hidden Line Graphics

This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It, along with a series of forms, is used to
turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics can be viewed in the drawing
environment. The Compose Drawing and the Add Category commands are used to perform
these steps.
1. Select Drawing Composition/Annotation from the Drawing Manager form, and activate
the drawing on which the vector hidden line process was run.
Notice that the wire frame drawing views are still displayed.
2. Select Drawing>Composition to activate the Composition palette.
3. Select the Compose Drawing command.

Copy Drawing View
The system displays the Compose Drawing form with a list of drawing views for the selected
drawing.
4. Select the appropriate drawing view number from the list.

The system activates the Display/Snap/Locate toggles.
5. Toggle from Display On to Display Off to turn the display off for all reference models of the
selected drawing view, and select Accept.
The system updates the selected drawing view and turns off the display.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each drawing view associated with the selected drawing.
7. Select View>Viewing to activate the Viewing palette.
8. Select the Category command.

Copy Drawing View
The system activates the Drawing Categories form.
9. Select the Add command.

The system displays the Add Drawing Categories form.
10. Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to turn on only the hidden line categories, and
select Accept.
11. Select View.
Place a data point to identify the screen view(s) to display the vector hidden line graphics.

Copy Drawing View
The system displays the hidden line graphic categories in the selected view(s). An example
of hidden line removed drawing graphics is shown in the following figure.
Compose Drawing View

This option lets you specify the origin at which to place the active drawing view within the
drawing border.

Copy Drawing View
This option also places MicroStation construction class graphics that represent the outline of
each drawing view. The graphic parameters for the outline are defined by the drawing category
for Non-plotted Drawing Graphics. An example of a drawing view outline is shown in the
following figure.
Number --- Displays the number (up to 6 characters) that identifies the drawing view.
Name --- Displays the name (up to 40 characters) that describes the drawing view.
Scale --- Displays the scale of the drawing view.
Composed --- Displays the composition status (Yes or No) of the drawing view.
are used.
Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other
coordinate labels will be used.

Copy Drawing View
 level = 62
 weight = 0
 line style = 0
This option also places MicroStation construction class graphics that represent the outline of
each drawing view. The graphic parameters for the outline are defined by the drawing category
for Non-plotted Drawing Graphics.
to...
Identify Place a data point within the drawing border to locate
Origin the center of the drawing view.
When the Compose Drawing form is active, you can move any drawing view (or
composite drawing view) within the drawing border. You can drag the outline of the drawing
views to confirm that the views fit within the drawing border and do not accidentally overlap
other drawing views.
You can overlap another drawing view if necessary to show a detail view within an elevation
view, for example. You can also confirm the drawing view scale and the size of the drawing
border.
 The system will automatically define a display depth large enough to display the drawing
view graphics.
 To move a drawing view within the border file, snap to the outline (or any element) of the
drawing view to be moved. Then drag the highlighted graphics to the preferred location and
press <D> to accept the location.
The move does not affect any annotation graphics associated with the drawing view. Therefore,
you should not move the drawing view once the drawing sheet has been annotated with
dimensioning, labels, etc. (You can use the Update Labels command to re-attach intelligent
labels after moving or redefining a drawing view. However, this does not update dimensioning or
dumb labels).
Reference Models
This option activates the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. It contains a list of the
current reference models attached to the active drawing view. The form contains options that
copy drawings, attach and detach models, and add, remove, and review model categories.
are set, the system displays the categories that are active in the selected models.

Copy Drawing View
The active drawing view must be specified on the Compose Drawing form.
Disc/Model Number --- Displays one character to identify the discipline, and displays the model
number.
Description --- Displays the description assigned to the model.
DSP SNP LOC --- Displays the model's Display, Snap, and Locate toggle status.
Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display on the
Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected reference
models.
Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information from the
reference models into the active file.
Apply to Active / Discipline / All --- Assigns the Display, Snap, and Locate toggle settings to
either the active drawing view only, or to all drawing views in the same discipline as the active
drawing view, or to all possible drawing views in all disciplines.
Copy Active Drawing (on page 184) --- Used to copy reference file attachments from the
drawing views in the active drawing.
Copy Another Drawing (on page 185)--- Copies reference model attachments from drawing
view in the project.
Attach Model (on page 186)--- Attaches reference models to a specified drawing view.
Automatic Attach & Verify (on page 187) --- Automatically attaches reference files for the
active drawing view. It displays a list of all models in the project that are within the range of the
selected drawing view volume.
Detach Model (on page 188)--- Removes the reference file from a specified drawing view
(deletes the reference model entry).
Reference Model Categories--- Reviews/revises, adds, or deletes model categories for the
active reference model.
Reload Reference Model --- Automatically reloads all selected reference models for a drawing
view.
to...

Copy Drawing View
Select Model Select a model from the list, then make any necessary
revisions to the toggle settings, then select an option from
the bottom of the form.
OR
Select Cancel to exit.
Copy Active Drawing

This option activates the Drawing View Selection form. It is used to copy reference model
attachments from the specified active drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing View
Selection list. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the system then displays the Copy
Drawing View Attachments form which allows you to copy models from the selected drawing
view.
Drawing Number --- Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing View Selection form
.
Attachments form.

Select Drawing Select the Drawing View Number that contains the
View reference model attachments to be copied, and Accept
the drawing view.
Select Model Select only those models that should not be copied. All
un-highlighted reference models will be copied. Select
Accept to copy the specified models.

Copy Drawing View
Copy Another Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It allows you to copy reference model
attachments from any drawing view in the project. First, the Drawing Types list displays. After a
drawing type is selected and accepted, the Drawing Selection list displays which allows you to
define models from a specific drawing model. After a drawing is selected and accepted, the
Drawing View Selection list displays. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the Copy
Drawing View Attachments list displays, which allows you to copy models from the selected
drawing views.
Drawing Number --- Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing View Selection form.
Attachments form.

Select Drawing Select the type of drawing to be copied.
Type
Select Drawing Select the drawing that contains the reference model
attachments to be copied, and Accept the drawing.
Select Drawing Select the Drawing View Number that contains the
View reference model attachments to be copied, and
Accept the drawing view.
Select Model Select only those models that should not be copied.
All un-highlighted reference models will be copied.
Select Accept to copy the specified models.

Copy Drawing View
Attach Model
This option is used to attach reference models to specified drawing views.
Discipline --- Displays the disciplines available for you to select.

Area --- Displays the numbers that identify the areas found in the selected discipline.
Area Description --- Displays the description of the areas found in the selected discipline.
Automatic Attach & Verify --- Automatically attaches reference files to the active drawing view.
It displays all the models within the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the
active drawing view. The system highlights the reference models which are already attached.
Select Models / Attach by Area --- Controls method of model selection. When the toggle is set
to Select Models, the system will display the models with the drawing type specified in the
Project Setup command. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference models in the
chosen area. If the Project Setup command was not used, the system will display the model
data categories that were active when each model was created.

Select Discipline Select a discipline, and select Accept.
or Exit
Select Area or Select an area, and select Accept.
Exit
When the toggle is set to Select Models,
the system will display the models with the drawing
type specified in the Project Setup command. The
Attach by Area setting will attach all reference
models in the chosen area. If the Project Setup
command was not used, the system will display the
model data categories that were active when each
model was created.
Select Model Select the model to attach to the drawing view.
are set, the system displays the categories that are active in the selected models.

Copy Drawing View
Automatic Attach & Verify

This option activates the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. It is used to
automatically attach reference files to the active drawing view. It displays all the models within
the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the active drawing view. The system
highlights the reference models which are already attached.
All Disciplines/Pre-Defined Disciplines --- The Pre-Defined Disciplines setting filters the
reference models by the discipline defined for the drawing type using the Project Setup
command. The All Disciplines setting displays all reference models in the drawing view volume
selected, regardless of the discipline.
Propogated / Sparse Models --- Only applicable for projects using ModelDraft, this toggle limits
the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propogated or sparse models in the reference
model display list. Propogated and sparse models cannot be attached simultaneously, unless
propogated and sparse graphics are included in the same model.
Disc/Model Name --- Displays a list of the currently-attached models on the Reference Models
form.

Toggle (Pre-Defined/All) Set the toggles to the appropriate settings.
and Accept
Select Model Select the models from the displayed
reference file list.
Accept or Select Accept the reference models to be attached
Additional Models to the active drawing view.

Copy Drawing View
Detach Model
This option is used to detach reference model attachments from a specified drawing view.
Disc/Model Number --- Displays the discipline and model number for currently-attached
models.
Description --- Displays the description for each of the currently-attached models.

Select Model Select the reference models to be detached
from the active drawing view.
Accept or Select Accept the highlighted reference model as
Additional Models the model to be detached, or select another
model.
Reference Model Categories

This option activates the Model Categories form. It is used to review, revise, add, and remove
reference model categories for a selected view.

Copy Drawing View
Review/Revise (on page 189) --- Reviews and revises the model categories (display levels)
displayed in a selected view.
Add (see "Add Category" on page 190) --- Adds model categories (display levels) to a selected
view.
Remove (see "Remove Category" on page 191) --- Removes model categories (display levels)
from a selected view.
All Model Graphics --- Selects all categories on the display list to be either added or removed,
depending on the action being performed. This option is only applicable for the Add and
Remove commands.
Selected Model Only / All Piping Reference --- Restricts the system to use either the selected
model only, or all piping reference models.

Select View Select a view for which you want to revise the
reference model categories.
Select View or Revise Select another view, or revise the active
Categories categories in the display list. Active categories
are highlighted, and the selected action will be
performed on them when the form is accepted.
Placing a data point on a category that is
currently turned on will turn it off.
Accept or Select Accept the current revisions, or make further
Categories revisions to the status of the categories.
Review/Revise
This option is the default option on the Model Categories form. It is already selected when the
form is activated. It reviews and revises the model categories (display levels) displayed for a
selected view.

Copy Drawing View
Select View Place a data point to identify the view to be

reviewed. All categories that are highlighted are
turned on for display.
Select View or Revise Select another view, or revise the active
Categories categories in the display list. Active categories
are highlighted, and the selected action will be
performed on them when the form is accepted.
Placing a data point on a category that is
currently turned on will turn it off.
Accept or Select Accept the current revisions, or make further
Categories revisions to the status of the categories.
Add Category
This option is used to add drawing categories for display in a selected view. You can specify that
all graphics be turned on for display, or that only specific categories be turned on.
All Model Graphics --- Activates all model graphics categories so that they will be displayed.

Select View Place a data point to identify the view to display the
added categories.
Select Category Select the categories to turn on in the view.
Select View or Select another view, or select Restart and select
Revise Categories other categories to be added.

Copy Drawing View
Remove Category
This command removes the model categories that are turned on in a selected view. The
categories are removed (deactivated) by de-highlighting them.
All Model Graphics --- Turns off all model graphics categories so that they will not be
displayed.

Select View Place a data point to identify the view from
which to remove categories.
Select Category Select the categories to turn off in the view.
Select View or Revise Select another view, or select Restart and
Categories select other categories to be removed.

Copy Drawing View
Delete Drawing View

This option deletes the selected drawing view (or composite drawing view).

Accept to Delete Drawing Select Accept to delete the selected drawing
View view and detach the MicroStation reference file
attachments for the drawing view.
Align Drawing View

This option enables you to align two or more existing (composed) drawing views using an
intelligent model graphic (such as a piping component or equipment nozzle) which is common to
all views.

Copy Drawing View
Identify Item Place a data point to identify an item in one of

the drawing views to be aligned.
Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted item or
press <R> to reject the item and make another
selection.
Identify Drawing View Snap to the border of the drawing view to be
to Align aligned, or select the desired view from the list
on the form.
Accept/Reject Drawing Press <D> to accept the highlighted item or
View press <R> to reject the item and make another
selection. When the highlighted item is
accepted, the system displays two intersecting
dotted lines connecting the identified
component to the corresponding component in
the view to be aligned.
Accept/Reject Drawing Press <D> to accept the displayed drawing
View Alignment view alignment, or press <R> to reject the
alignment and view an alternative alignment.
When the drawing view alignment is accepted,
the system repositions the drawing view so that
the selected component is positioned at the
point of intersection of the displayed lines.
The system repeats the prompts until you

accept an alignment.

Copy Drawing View
Revise View Data

This option activates the Revise Drawing View Data form. It is used to revise the clipping
volume and view scale of an existing drawing view (or composite drawing view) that has already
been composed. When revising composite drawing view data, the form contains additional
options for Orientation and Redefine Individual Views. Refer to Revise Composite Drawing View
Data for more information.
The active drawing view must be selected on the Compose Drawing form.
View Number --- Displays the current number for the selected view. You can key in a new one,
if needed.
View Name --- Displays the current name for the selected view. You can key in a new one, if
needed.
View Scale --- Displays the current scale of the selected view. You can change the scale by
placing a data point in this field. The list of available scales will activate, and you will be
prompted to select the desired scale.
Drawing View Volume --- Displays the current clipping volume associated with the active
drawing view.

Select Attribute for Select any field on the form for revision.
Revision
You can rescale the drawing view by selecting the
View Scale field to activate the scale display list
and selecting a new scale value. The clipping
limits are also scaled as a result of this operation.
To revise any of the drawing view volume
coordinates, select the associated field and key in
the new value. You can key in a negative value to
specify a westing, southing, or elevation
coordinate.
The drawing view in the following figure illustrates
an example of a revised clipping volume.

Copy Drawing View
Specify Drawing View Select a scale value from the display list.
Scale
When the view scale is revised, the system revises the scale in the Drawing View (or Composite
Drawing View) entity so that any drawing view scale displayable attribute labels in the drawing
for this drawing view can be updated. The system updates the clipping volume for the active
drawing view to reflect the new coordinate settings.

Copy Drawing View
Revise Orientation
This option activates the Revise Orientation form. It is used to revise the orientation for the
active drawing view. The current orientation for the active drawing view is highlighted on the
form.
The active drawing view must be selected on the Compose Drawing form.
View Number --- Displays the number that identifies the active drawing view.
View Name --- Displays the name that describes the active drawing view.
Degrees Rotated --- Key in the number of degrees you want to rotate the view. This field is only
applicable when Rotated View is selected.
Rotate Drawing View: Model X, Model Y, Model Z --- Rotates the active drawing view around
either the X, Y, or Z axis. This option is only applicable when Rotated View is selected.

Select Drawing View Select one of the seven orientations from the
Orientation form to specify the new orientation, or select
Rotated View to activate the Model X, Model
Y, or Model Z options. Then select an option
to rotate the current orientation.
Keyin Angle (0-360) Key in the angle by which to rotate the
drawing view about the selected axis. Positive
values will rotate counter-clockwise, while
negative values will rotate clockwise.
If the rotated view does not fall into one
of the seven standard orientations, the
orientation is displayed as Rotated View.
A revised orientation example for a drawing
view is shown below.

Copy Drawing View
Unassigned Views
This option is used to assign previously-created unassigned views to a drawing. You can select
a view to be composed from a displayed list. Any views selected from the list and left
un-composed will be unassigned and available for later selection.

Copy Drawing View
Unassigned drawing views must have been previously created with the Project Planner (on
page 287).
1. Select the Unassigned Views option from the Compose Drawing form.
The system activates the Select Unassigned Views form which lists all the unassigned views
for each orientation.
2. Select the orientation of the unassigned view to be placed.
3. Select the view to be assigned.
4. Select Accept to return to the Compose Drawing form.
Area Volume Graphics

The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design areas in
the drawing so that you can see their location.
For the Drawing Graphics environment, you can control the symbology of the volume graphics
using the PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager in Project
Administrator. Please refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on
changing the volume graphic symbology.
Before you can see the volumes in the Equipment, Raceway, PE_HVAC, and FrameWorks Plus
environments, you must turn on the Constructions view attribute. You can activate the View
Attributes dialog box by pressing CTRL+B.
In addition, the following system environment variables must be defined to control the
symbology and level of the volumes in the Piping, Equipment, Raceway, PE_HVAC, and
FrameWorks Plus environments:
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL
Please refer to the Project Setup Technical Reference Guide for more information on setting
environment variables.

Copy Drawing View
Place Diagonal Lines - Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for easier
identification in the drawing.
Add / Revise Graphics - Select the area to add to the model, or unselect an already selected
drawing to remove it from the drawing.
Remove Graphics - Removes the selected area from the drawing.
Hilite Graphics - Highlights the area in the drawing.
Update Graphics - Updates areas that are already displayed in the drawing. Use this command
if the boundaries of the area are changed, or if the drawing view definition has changed.
Drawing view definition includes drawing view location in the drawing, drawing view scale, and
drawing view location.

Copy Drawing View

SECTION 9
Revision Markers
This command activates the Revision Markers form, and is used to place a revision triangle or
revision cloud on a drawing.
The graphic parameters for the revision triangle or revision cloud must be previously defined in
the Label Description Library. Label number 205 is reserved for revision triangles.
Refer to the "Create Label Graphic Data" section in the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)
Reference Guide to define the graphic parameters. The "PDS Drawing Annotation Category
Data" section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide defines the color codes
and line weights.
Draw Revision Cloud --- Defines the type of revision marker as cloud.
Draw Revision Triangle --- Defines the type of revision marker as a triangle.
Move Label --- Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. You can
move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new location using drag
mode.The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as
the leader line).
Place a second data point to place the label at the new location.
This command allows you to select Acceptto identify the last label placed.
1. Select the Revision Markers command.
The system activates the Revision Markers form.
2. Select Revision Option.
3. Select the type of revision marker to be placed from the Revision Markers form. To place a
revision triangle, go to step 3.
OR
To place a revision cloud, complete steps 4 through 7.
4. Specify Triangle Location.

Revision Markers
Place a data point to specify the location for the revision triangle to be placed on the drawing
view.
The system places a triangle at the specified location and places the drawing revision
number (retrieved from the drawing RDB) in the triangle.
5. Specify Arc Start Point.
Place a data point to indicate the starting point for the first arc in the cloud.
6. Specify Arc Curvature.
Place a data point to indicate a point on the arc.
7. Specify Arc End Point.
Place a data point to indicate the end point for the arc.
The system displays the defined arc.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to define all the arcs which form the cloud.
A revision cloud is treated as a closed element. When you snap to the initial start point for
the end point of an arc, the placement is complete.
Display Report
This command activates the Display Report form. It contains a list of reports for the active
project. You can display a report by selecting it from the list, and the report can be placed in a
drawing using the Place Report in Drawing option.
Graphic parameters such as color, weight, and character size for the report can be set in
the Project Data Manager under graphic symbology data for drawings.
Move Element --- Moves a placed cell.

Delete Element --- Deletes a placed cell.
1. Select the Display Report command from the panel menu.
The system displays the Display Report form with a list of the reports.
2. Select Report.
Select the report to be displayed from the list on the Display Report form.

Revision Markers
3. Accept or Select Other Report.

Accept the highlighted report, select another report. The system displays the report on the
Display Report form.
You can view the displayed report by using the arrows in the center of the form to move left
and right and the scroll bar to move up and down.
4. Select the Select Another Report option to re-display the report list for selection and
display of another report.
OR
Select the Place Report in Drawing option from the Display Report form to place the
displayed report in the drawing view.
5. Key in the required Max Blank Lines and Space Factor values.
When you generate a report, there can be sections with blank lines. Max Blank Lines limits
the number of blank lines to the specified value when you place the report in a drawing.

Revision Markers
Space Factor sets the spacing between the lines in the report. he default spacing is set in
Project Administrator.
Select the desired Report Position to specify the report placement parameters. These
parameters set the justification when you place the report in a drawing.
6. Data Button will Place Report.
Place a data point in the drawing view to specify the location of the report being placed.
The justification is from the data button in the view.
Place Cell
This command is used to place user-defined cell into a drawing.The cell's name, which does not
display in the form, and the cell's description needs to be defined in a Drawing Annotation Cells
List, dwg_cell_list, in the project directory. Each cell name, followed by the description, must be
on a separate line and at least one space must separate the cell name from the description. The
description is limited to 60 characters. Blank lines and comment lines beginning with an
exclamation point (!) in the first column may be placed anywhere in this library.
Because cells placed with MicroStation do not respect the PD_Draw pre-defined
category settings, attempting to move or delete cells placed through MicroStation may cause
unpredictable results. It is recommended that all desired cells be added to the PD_Draw cell
library (and added to the dwg_cell_list file) and placed through the PDS Place Cell command.
Move Element --- Moves a placed cell.

Delete Element --- Deletes a placed cell.
Active Scale --- Key in the active scale for the cell.
Active Angle --- Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle.
Horizontal --- Defines the orientation for the cell as horizontal.
Vertical --- Defines the orientation for the cell as vertical.
1. Select the Place Cell command.
The Place User Cell form displays.
2. Select the cell to place.

Revision Markers
3. Define the Active Scale and Active Angle if you want.

4. Place the cell in the drawing.
Place Text and Line

This command is used to place user-defined text labels that are not associated with data from
the RDB. You define the text to be displayed, as well as the following text (and line) attributes to
be used for display:
 Drawing category
 Line Style
 Line Weight
 Text Height
 Text Width
 Text Weight
 Orientation
Until the default values for these attributes have been set in Project Data Manager, the
weight value for lines and other graphics will be applied to text. Remember that changes made
to the text and line attribute values will only apply for text and lines placed immediate following
the change. Once another drawing category is selected, any changes made to the text and line
attribute values will no longer be active.
Line Style --- Determines the active line style. If selected, this option activates a graphic display
of line styles for you to select from. Select the desired line style, and it will replace the
currently-displayed line style.
Justification Options --- Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text relative to
its origin.

Revision Markers
These options are the PDS interface for automating the MicroStation Text Justification feature.
The letters on each button have the following meanings:
 L = left
 R = right
 T = top
 B = bottom
 C = center
 M = margin (applicable to multi-line labels only)
For example, select R M B to place the origin at the right margin on the bottom line of text in a
multi-line label, or select C C to place the origin at the absolute center of the label.
Refer to the MicroStation documentation if you need more information about text
justification.
Horizontal/Vertical --- Places the text parallel to the horizontal or vertical plane. (These options
are mutually exclusive.)
Place Line Active Angle --- Places a line with user-defined endpoints at the active angle.
Place Line --- Places a line with user-defined endpoints at the angle determined by the
endpoints.
Place Text --- Prompts for the user-defined text, and then places it at the active angle at the
point selected.
Move Element --- Allows movement of selected elements. Place a data point on the element to
be moved, then move the element to the desired location. Place a second data point to select
the new location of the element, and then hit the Reject/Reset button to accept the new
placement and finish the operation.
Delete Element --- Allows deletion of selected elements. Place a data point on the element to
be deleted, and then place a second data point to accept the deletion of the selected element.
Active Angle --- Displays the current active angle at which the text (and line, if applicable) will
be displayed.
Enter Text --- Accepts the user-defined text that will be placed. This field will display up to 40
characters at once, although more can be entered into the field.
Weight --- Displays the current line weight value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a
different value to be entered.
Text Height --- Displays the current text height value. Placing a data point on this field will allow
a different value to be entered.
Text Width --- Displays the current text width value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a
Text Weight --- Displays the current text weight value. Placing a data point on this field will
allow a different value to be entered.
to...
Select Select the category to which the text and line
Category attributes will be assigned.

Revision Markers
Overlay Drawing
This command attaches another orthographic drawing as a reference file to the active drawing
to share drawing annotation between related drawings.
Only the drawing annotation categories from the overlay drawing is displayed. Category display
changes made using the Drawing Categories command for the active drawing also updates any
overlaid drawings.
1. Select the Overlay Drawing command.

The Overlay Drawing Annotation form displays.
Select a drawing type from the list and Accept.
A list of available drawings for that drawing type displays.
3. Select Drawing(s) and Accept.

Revision Markers
Select the drawings to overlay and Accept.
Review Attribute
This command activates the Review Attribute form. It is used to display the attribute values of
the identified piping component or segment, attribute values of the selected equipment item, and
attribute values of the selected equipment nozzle. It displays information on the selected
attribute for ModelDraft, HVAC, and raceway components. It also reviews the user data
associated with the element and the information associated with the PDS markers placed in the
model.
1. Select the Review Attribute command from the Annotation palette.

The system activates the Review Attributes form.
2. Identify Element.
The system displays the attribute values from the database for the selected element.
Measure Distance
This option activates the Measure Distance form, used to for measuring distances between any
two components (piping, equipment, structural, etc.) or inquiring the location of any component
in terms of the project's Plant Coordinate System.

Revision Markers
Reference Point --- Select this option to define from which point to start measuring from.
Keypoint Snap / Project Snap --- If set to Keypoint Snap, tentative points go to the nearest
element keypoint. The number of element keypoints can be changed using the ky= MicroStation
key-in. If set to Project Snap, tentative points connect to the element where they are placed.
Measurement Point --- Defines the point being specified as the point to measure to.
Delta Easting --- Displays the easting distance between the two points.
Delta Northing --- Displays the northing distance between the two points.
Delta Elevation --- Displays the elevation distance between the two points.
Absolute --- Displays the actual distance between the two points.
1. Select the Measure Distance command from the bar menu.
The Measure Distance form displays.
Define the Keypoint Snap / Project Snap toggle.
2. Specify Reference Point or Select Other Option.
3. Identify the point to measure from.
The Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates of the reference point displays in the left
message field.
4. Enter Measurement Point or Select Other Option.
Identify the point to measure to.
The Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates of the measurement point displays in the
right message field. The distance between the two points displays.

Revision Markers
Drawing Annotation Symbology

This option activates the Drawing Annotation Symbology form. It is used to update the active
line weight, symbology, color, and text size values by selecting from the displayed list. This
command can be used to more easily control the graphic parameter setup prior to the creation
of miscellaneous drawing annotation using MicroStation placement commands.
You can use Project Manager to specify the named category and the associated graphic
parameters (including line terminator, text font, and text line spacing) in the Reference
Database.
Until the default values for these attributes have been set in Project Data Manager, the
weight value for lines and other graphics will be applied to text. Remember that changes made
to the text and line attribute values will only apply for text and lines placed immediate following
the change. Once another drawing category is selected, any changes made to the text and line
attribute values will no longer be active.
Justification Options (Just) --- Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text
relative to its origin.
 L = left
 R = right
 T = top
 B = bottom
 C = center

Revision Markers
justification.
Line Style --- Determines the active line style. If selected, this option activates a graphic display
of line styles for you to select from. Select the desired line style, and it will replace the
currently-displayed line style.
Weight --- Displays the current line weight value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a
Text Height --- Displays the current text height value. Placing a data point on this field will allow
a different value to be entered.
Text Width --- Displays the current text width value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a
Text Weight --- Displays the current text weight value. Placing a data point on this field will
allow a different value to be entered.
1. Select the Drawing Annotation Symbology command from the bar menu.
The system displays the Drawing Annotation Symbology form with a list of the predefined
drawing annotation categories.
2. Select Category.
Select a category to use.
The system displays the message Active Placement Data Updated.
3. Define any overrides values you want to use.
4. Select Cancel to exit the form, or select and accept another drawing annotation category to
be updated.
Name Label
This command activates the Name Label form, and is used to place annotation graphics, text,
and labels on the drawing.
The list of name labels available for placement can be restricted on the basis of drawing
type. This is done in Project Setup; refer to this section found later in the document for more
information.

Revision Markers
The Project Data Manager module controls whether or not the Leader Line ON/OFF and Line
Terminator ON/OFF options are available for use.
The graphics for the name label are placed on the MicroStation level associated with the PDS
Drawing category of name labels. The graphic parameters and label text contents for the label
type are defined in the Label Description Library. Refer to the PDS Piping Reference Database
User's Guide for more information on category assignments and label descriptions. The system
places name labels in a drawing with capitalized text regardless of how the data is stored.
Labels can include an angle such as the bend angle of a piping component to be displayed in
degrees and minutes, including any decimal attributes, on the basis of the angular format. This
format is specified on the Angular/Slope Label/Readout form in the Project Data Manager.
Mechanics
Placing Name Labels in Circular Enclosures
When placing name labels with circles, make sure the text height is small enough to fit inside of
the circle. The circle does not open if the text height is too large.
The following rules apply to any labels specified to be enclosed within a circle or a circle with a
bisector:
 You specify the circle diameter in absolute terms, for example 1/2", in the Label Description
Library Manager when the label is created or revised. If the circle diameter is undefined, the
circle is created in the same manner as the current practice.
 If the label's text does not include a dash and the text fits within the circle defined for that
label, the label's text is center-justified in circle.
 If the label's text does not include a dash but the text does not fit within the circle defined for
that label, the label's text is placed left-justified with respect to the circle and the right side of
the circle is opened for the text.
 If the label's text includes a dash, the text is broken into two lines. The text that precedes the
dash will be placed above the bisector, and the text that follows the dash will be placed
below the bisector. The dash itself is not included within the label.
 A user-defined extension to the text length can be used to determine whether or not the
label's text fits within the circular enclosure. This extension is specified using the
Miscellaneous Label Data form in Project Data Manager (Project Administrator). The
extension is specified as a scale factor of the average text width of the label. ("Average text
width" is defined as the actual text length divided by the number of characters comprising
the text.)If no extension is specified in Project Data Manager, the default extension of .25
times the average text width.
Placing Name Labels in Rectangular Enclosures
The following rules apply to any labels specified to be enclosed within a rectangle:
 The length of the rectangle is determined by the actual length of the label's text for that
specific label - not the maximum length of the label's text, as defined in the Label Description
Library. This length is padded by .25 times the text width unless a user-defined extension is
used.
 The label's text is left-justified for multi-line labels.
 A user-defined extension to the text length can be used to determine whether or not the
label's text fits within the circular enclosure. This extension is specified using the
Miscellaneous Label Data form in Project Data Manager (Project Administrator). The
extension is specified as a scale factor of the average text width of the label. ("Average text
width" is defined as the actual text length divided by the number of characters comprising
the text.)If no extension is specified in Project Data Manager, the default extension of .25
times the average text width.

Revision Markers
Placing Name Labels to Identify Equipment Groups

When you want to place a name label on an equipment group that is a parametric shape
(defined through Equipment Eden), snap to an element within the parametric shape. The
associative linkage, which uniquely identifies the parametric shape within the equipment group,
and the key point that identifies that element will be used to associate (and update) the label
with the equipment group.
 If the Equipment Eden definition for a parametric shape is modified after a label has been
associated with it, the associativity between the element and the label may be lost. In this
case, you will need to delete the label and place a new one.
 If the parametric shape is deleted and replaced, a new associative linkage will be assigned,
and subsequent use of Update Labels will automatically delete the label.
This feature has no effect on labels associated with nozzles, since nozzles have well-defined
connect points.
If the equipment group was placed using primitive shapes, the gruop will have no associative
linkage, and you must associate the label with the equipment group's attribute linkage by placing
a data point on the appropriate element. Therefore, it is recommended that you create
equipment groups using Equipment Eden as much as possible.
System label selection: --- Select Component Tag, Piping Line Number, Piping Piecemark, or
Piping Reducer to label a specific item within a drawing view.
Drawing View Scale --- Select to place a displayable attribute label for the drawing view scale.
Drawing View Name --- Select to place a displayable attribute label for the drawing view name.
You can specify the drawing view for which the drawing view scale or name label applies by
snapping to the outline graphics for the drawing view or by identifying a design element in the
drawing view. Unless specifically notified (by a message), these labels can all be updated with
the Update Labels command.
User label selection ---

Revision Markers
Select the Drawing View option or one of the four discipline (Piping/Equipment, Structural,
PLANTGEN, Electrical Raceway) options, and specify the type of label from a display list
associated with the selected option to place user-defined labels.
Select Miscellaneous to place labels from the Miscellaneous list defined in the Label Description
Library of Reference Data Manager (PD_Data). Refer to the description of the Label Description
Library in the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for more information on creating labels
with user-specified text.
Select User Input to place a label with text to be specified as the label is created. Select the
label from the display list and key in the text string, which remains active until you select a
different label type or select the Restart button. To key in a two line label, key in a backslash "\"
in the text string where you want the second line to start. This user-specified text is respected by
the Update Labels command. Refer to the description of the Label Description Library in the
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for more information on creating labels with
user-specified text.
Text Drag Off/On --- Defines if the name label text is placed using drag mode or not. After the
leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode. Moving the text
does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the dragged text, select Accept from
the pocket menu.
Place No Leader/Place Leader Line --- Defines if the label is placed with a leader line or not.
When no leader line is placed, and the drag mode is enabled, the text for the label will be
formed and displayed in drag mode. You may then use the data button, or snap to existing
graphics in the drawing to specify the desired location of the label. You can cancel the label
placement with the reset button.
Def Line Style / Alt Line Style --- Set to designate use of the default or alternate line style. The
values for these line styles are defined in Project Data Manager. The centerline style will be
used as the alternate line style until you define this value differently on the basis of label type in
Project Data Manager.
Line Term Off/On --- Defines if the leader line terminator displays or not.
Once the label is placed in the drawing, both the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line and
the Line Term Off/On options remains in effect until you do one of the following:
 Change the option for either the leader line or the line terminator.
 Select a different label type.
 Select an option that results in a different list of label types being displayed.
 Select the Restart button.
 Exit the command.
 Select one of the following options within the Place Name Label command:
 Define Active Leader Line
 Move Label
 Move Text Only

Revision Markers
 Modify Label
 Delete Element
 Place Flow Arrow
 Add Coordinate Label
Axis Lock Off/On --- When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for placement of name
labels in a drawing. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In
other words, one segment can be locked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing,
whereas another segment may not be locked to a drawing axis.
Active Leader Line On/Off --- Set to On to place the leader line defined with the Define Active
Leader Line option. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the label description library for the
selected label.
You can select an alternate line style for any leader line that is used as a centerline extension
without affecting name labels' text, label enclosures, or line terminators.
Name Label Only/With Coordinate Label --- Toggle to place a name label only, or to place a
name label and a coordinate label as one operation. Following the placement of the name label
the system activates the Coordinate Label form. Refer to Coordinate Label (on page 220). Both
the name label and the coordinate label created with this command can be updated using the
Update Labels command.
The text for the coordinate labels and the name labels are associated for move, modify,
and delete operations. However, the data structure of the combination label distinguishes
between the text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label when updating the
labels.
The text representing the coordinate label is created on the MicroStation level associated with
the drawing category for coordinate labels. The text representing the name label and the
remaining graphics are created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing category
for name labels.
Add Label Below/Add Label Above --- Toggle used when placing name labels using the With
Coordinate Label option to specify whether the coordinate label is placed above or below the
name label.
With Active Angle/Along Leader Line --- Set to With Active Angle to specify that the label
text be oriented along the active angle, or set to Along Leader Line to specify that the text be
oriented along the leader line's last segment.
Coordinate Label --- Activates the Coordinate Label form. This form allows you to place
coordinate labels.
 L = left
 R = right
 T = top
 B = bottom
 C = center

Revision Markers

justification.
Text Size --- Defines the label text size. Select the active text size from the list box or select
Select From Label to set the active text size to that of an existing label.
Active Angle: --- Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Set the With
Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.
Horizontal --- Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal.
Vertical --- Defines the orientation for the active label as vertical.
Define Active Leader Line --- Defines a leader line as the leader line used when the Active
Leader Line toggle is set to On, the system automatically places the defined active leader line
with the label.
Move Label --- Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a
single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the
text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if a label consists of at least one
coordinate value and a name label, you may move the name label, and leave the coordinate
value(s) in the current position. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire.
After setting the toggle to the desired position, place a data point or snap to identify the label to
be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new
location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all
associated graphics, such as the leader line).
This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.
Move Text Only --- Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire text, or move
just a single text element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected,
only the text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle is
Move Entire.
After setting the toggle to the desired position, select and place a data point or snap to identify
the text label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move Entire Label option except
that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain in place. The system puts the
text only in raster drag.
Modify Label --- This option provides the features of the Move Label option and the
MicroStation Modify Element command. Select and place a data point or snap to identify the
label to be modified.

Revision Markers
Snap lock and text drag modes are automatically activated with this command, and they are
restored to their previous values when exiting this command by any means. Also, this option
respects the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line, Line Terminator ON/OFF, and
Default/Alternate Line Style options on the basis of the label identified, regardless of the
previous status of these options. These options will be restored to their previous settings upon
the command being exited by any means.
If a label was placed with a leader line or a line terminator, you can delete the existing leader
line or terminator by disabling the appropriate option. By default, deleting a leader line will
automatically delete its terminator, if one exists. If the label does not include a leader line, you
can place one by enabling the Place Leader Line option. When placing a leader line, the first
point for the leader line will be the "key point" of the component used in initially creating the
label. You will be prompted for the remaining vertices of the leader line.
For "combination" labels that contain a coordinate label and a name label, the leader line and
terminator will assume the symbology associated with the label you select.
If text drag mode is enabled, the text will be placed in drag mode for you to re-position once you
accept the leader line. If drag mode is disabled, the location of the text for the label will not be
revised as part of adding the leader line.
You can revise the active angle for the text or drag the identified label, leader line or two
segments of a leader line by their vertex to the desired destination and place a data point. You
can move the text with the label enclosure graphics, if applicable. The leader line segment
closest to the text rubber-bands, stretching until the next data point is placed.
If you snap near a vertex, the segments joined by it are moved together to the next data point
placed. If you snap to the text part of the label, the label is moved from the nearest vertex. If you
snap to a point along a segment of a leader line, the leader line is moved. If you snap to the
leader line or the vertex of the leader line closest to the text, both the leader line and the text are
moved.
If the orientation of the active label is revised, subsequent labels identified will automatically be
rotated to that orientation.
This option maintains the associativity between the location of the label in the drawing and the
location of the component in the model being labeled.
You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and Accept the displayed leader
line.
Delete Element --- Deletes entire or selected elements of name or coodinate labels. This option
activates a Delete Entire / Delete Partial toggle. Set the toggle to entire or partial, select the
label to be deleted, and then perform a data-button search to identify the element to be deleted.
Then, press <D> to accept the element, or press <R> to reset.
 This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.
 If a combination label (consisting of multiple text elements) is selected, you may delete a
single text element.
Place Flow Arrow --- Select and place a data point to identify the pipe to be labeled with a flow
direction arrow. Then press <D> to accept the highlighted pipe. You can place a flow arrow
(including bi-directional flow arrows, where applicable) in any drawing view if flow for the
drawing was defined in the design file. If flow has not been defined for the specified pipe, a
message is displayed informing you that the flow direction is undefined. Place a data point to
specify the origin for the flow arrow symbol.
Add Coordinate Label --- Select and place a data point or snap to identify the previously
created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify the component

Revision Markers
being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The system automatically
creates the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the identified name label and
associates the two labels. Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by
using the Update Labels command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for the name
label are associated for move, modify, and delete operations.
 The flow arrow symbol must be defined in active cell library for the drawing as in the
delivered cell library.
The system projects this point to the centerline of the pipe and places the flow arrow. Flow
arrows can also be placed during automatic label placement.
If drag mode is enabled, the flow arrow will be oriented in drag mode on the basis of the
direction of flow in the model and the drawing view's orientation.
Edit Text (on page 219)--- Select this option to partially edit that part of the user-defined text in
the label.
Add Name Label --- Select and place a data point or snap to identify the previously created
coordinate label to be used for adding a name label. (Do not identify the component being
labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The system automatically creates the
name label relative to the witness line of the identified coordinate label and associates the two
labels. Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels
command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for
move, modify, and delete operations.
At any point in the operation of this command, you can set the character size or define the label
orientation.
1. Select the Name Label command.
The system activates the Name Label form.
2. Select the desired label option to be used to place name labels from the Name Label form.
3. Identify Component.
Place a data point to identify the item to be labeled such as a pipe, component, piping line,
or drawing view border for view scale or name labels.
4. Accept/Reject.
Press <D> to accept the highlighted item, or press <R> to reject the item and make another
selection.
5. Toggle the appropriate lock option to on or off as desired.
6. To place element labels and miscellaneous annotation labels, continue with Step 7 to
identify the vertices of the leader line.
OR
Go to Step 9 to place drawing view and drawing scale labels.
7. Enter Data Pt 2.
Place a series of data points to identify the vertices of the reference line running from the
identified component to the label location. The leader line rubber-bands, following you to the
next data point.
You can press <R> to back up and replace the previous vertex. (For example, the first data
point defaults to the location point identified in Step 4, so the first prompt asks for data point
2. If you press <R> the system prompts for data point 1 enabling you to specify the starting
vertex of the leader line.)

Revision Markers
8. Accept Leader Line or Reset.

Select Accept at any point to complete the reference line and set the label location. (For
example, if Accept is used when only one vertex of the leader line has been defined, the
active label orientation is used to place the label with no leader line. When no leader line is
present, you can place the label in drag mode.)
Some labels are defined in the label description library to have no leader lines. For
these labels the system only prompts for the location of the text.
An example of element labels placed using a leader line to set the label location is shown
below.
9. Enter Label Location.

Place a data point in the view to identify the location of the drawing view name, drawing
scale label, or other label.
10. Select the desired option from the bottom of the form to manipulate, modify, add or delete
name labels placed in the drawing view(s).
Edit Text
This option is used to edit partially a part of the user label. It cannot be used to edit text in a
non-associative label created with the Place Text command. This command does not replace
any text formed from attribute data or predefined text.
1. Select the Edit Text option from the Update Labels form.
2. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap).
Place a data point or snap to identify the label to be edited.
3. Key in text to be replaced in label.
Key in the text string to be replaced from the user-defined portion of the identified label.
4. Key in replacement text.

Revision Markers
Key in the text string to replace the specified string, and select Accept to process the
specified edit.
If the name label being edited is a user-input associative label, the system prompts for a
substring to search in the label's text and the substring with which it is to be replaced.
Only a substring of the user-defined part of the label is substituted through this option. It
does not replace any text formed from attribute data or predefined in the Label Description
Library.
For named labels, only name labels with a user-defined attribute defined as part of the label
in the Label Description Library can be edited with this command.
You can use MicroStation commands to delete or add graphics to the label as long as the
additions are added to the label graphic group.
Coordinate Label
This command activates the Coordinate Label form. It is used to label the coordinates at a
specified location, to select the coordinate values to be labeled, and to specify the form of the
coordinate label. These options may require frequent changes depending on the density and
configuration of data within the area being labeled.
Most coordinate labels can be updated to reflect changes in the model, or to be realigned with a
drawing view which was modified. However, coordinate labels placed in non-PDS models are
non-associative. A warning is displayed indicating that the coordinate label will not be moved,
updated, or deleted automatically by the Update Labels command on the basis of any changes
to the corresponding non-PDS model.
Since the coordinate value(s) to be labeled reflect the active PDS Coordinate System, the
graphics for the coordinate label are placed on the MicroStation level associated with the PDS
Drawing category for coordinate labels. Refer to the Project Data Manager section in the PD
Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on category assignments and label
descriptions.
Until you revise the default values in Project Data Manager, the Coordinate Label command
uses the following symbology options:
 The default line style of coordinate label witness lines is solid (0).
 The alternate (centerline) line style for coordinate label witness lines is dashed (4).
 Any coordinate label with no prefix or suffix defined will be displayed with the text height and
width for coordinate labels without supplementary text.
 Any coordinate label with a prefix or suffix defined will be displayed using the text width,
height, and weight determined by the prefix/suffix supplementary text option.
 There will be two spaces between the prefix or suffix and the coordinate value. Any leading
or trailing blanks defined in the prefix or suffix will be automatically removed prior to forming
the coordinate label.

Revision Markers
The line spacing for labels with multiple lines is determined from the RDB data for the drawing.
For previously-created drawings, the default is the present function of text height. Placement of
a coordinate label without a leader line is based on the active MicroStation text/text node
justification.
Label Only --- Places the label only (no leader lines). When using this command and the drag
mode, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You may then use the
data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the desired location of the
label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button. (Coordinate label justification
settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.)
Label Placement Options --- Determine placement of the label's text along the leader line.
 Above - Places the label's text above the leader line.
 Below - Places the label's text below the leader line.
 --- On --- - Places the label's text on the leader line, and places no character other than
those in the label's text.
 [On] - Places the label's text on the leader line, and between brackets.
 --- End - Places the label's text at the end of the leader line.
Coordinate Sequence --- Displays the current sequence in which coordinate values will be
defined. The default sequence is Easting, Northing, Elevation. To change this sequence, place a
data point in this field; this activates a list of possible sequences for you to choose from.
Select the desired sequence by placing a data point on it. Any coordinate labels created prior to
this enhancement will be considered by the Update Labels command to have been defined as
Easting, Northing, Elevation.

Revision Markers
Supplementary Text Options --- You can specify that the coordinate label be created with
supplementary text. This text supplements the basic coordinate label, which consists of the
coordinate value, the coordinate axis short description, and the coordinate system short
description. The supplementary text can be placed as a prefix or suffix.
Supplementary text may be edited or added in the drawing's seed data (Type 63) through the
Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference
Guide for more information regarding supplementary text.
Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of special text
options. If you select one of the Prefix or Suffix options, the system prompts for the text.
The prefix and suffix text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data Manager
section in the PD Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on defining these
values. Some of these options are only valid when labeling a specific coordinate value, such as
Bottom of Pipe and Elevation.
Bottom of Pipe --- If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation
coordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels to have
the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated when selected in
conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation.
Face of Flange --- If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted end of a
piping item which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half gasket separation.
For equipment nozzles, the datum point location is at the face-of-flange so it is not necessary to
compensate for gasket separation. This command verifies that you have selected a bolted end
of a piping component, a pipe, an instrument component, or a nozzle.
Top of Steel --- If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation
of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
You may place a top-of-steel coordinate label using sparse model graphics. If you do so, you
must snap to a structural member for which the center line represents top-of-steel.
Top of Concrete --- If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the highest
elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
Top of Platform --- If you select Top of Platform, the coordinate value labeled is the elevation
of the plane of the platform on which the grating or checkered plate is supported.
If a structural model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules will apply:
The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the structural component, rather than the
elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a horizontal component
is not identified in conjunction with this feature.
Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or the platform
which it describes.
If an equipment model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules will apply:
The elevation option for the coordinates will be automatically enabled.

Revision Markers
The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the equipment's parametric shape, rather
than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a horizontal
component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.
Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or the platform
which it describes
Bottom of Duct --- If you select Bottom of Duct, the coordinate value labeled is the lowest
elevation of the HVAC duct rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
Text Drag Off/On --- Defines if the coordinate label text is placed using drag mode or not. After
the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode. Moving the
text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the dragged text, select Accept
from the pocket menu.
Line Term Off/On --- Set to determine whether or not the witness line for a coordinate label has
a line terminator.
The line terminator specified in the RDB for coordinate labels is used if the line terminator
is on. If you choose a witness line without a line terminator, a gap is left between the location
being labeled and the end of the witness line. The plot size of the gap is defined in the RDB.
Axis Lock On/Off --- When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for placement of
coordinate labels with as many as four vertices. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the
vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either the horizontal or
vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be locked to a drawing axis.
Activation of the axis lock limits you to a leader line with only two vertices, and deactivation
enables you to place a leader line with as many as four vertices.
selected label.
Coordinate Only/With Name Label --- Toggle to create a coordinate label only, or create a
coordinate label and a name label as one operation. Following the placement of the coordinate
label, the system activates the Name Label form. Both the coordinate label and the name label
created with this command can be updated using the Update Labels commands.
The text for the coordinate labels and the name labels are associated for move, modify,
and delete operations. However, the data structure of the combination label distinguishes
labels.
The text representing the name label is created on the MicroStation level associated with the
drawing category for name labels. The text representing the name coordinate and the remaining
graphics are created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for
coordinate labels.
Name Label option to specify whether the name label is placed above or below the coordinate
label.
With Active Angle/Along Leader Line --- Set to With Active Angle to specify that the label text
be oriented along the active angle, or set to Along Leader Line to specify that the text be

Revision Markers
Name Label --- Activates the Name Label form. This form allows you to place name labels.
 L = left
 R = right
 T = top
 B = bottom
 C = center
justification.
Define Active Leader Line --- Defines a leader line as the leader line used when the Active
with the label.
Move Label --- Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a
single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the
After setting the toggle to the desired setting, select and place a data point or snap to identify
the label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to
a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all

Revision Markers
Move Text Only --- Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move
just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only
the text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle is Move
Entire.
Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. This option works the
same as the Move Label option except that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics
remain in place. The system puts the text only in raster drag.
moved.
line.

Revision Markers
label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify the element to be deleted.
 This command also deletes rejection markers placed by the Mass Annotation command.
Add Coord Label --- Select and place a data point or snap to identify a previously created
name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify the component being
labeled.)Then, place a data point to specify the label location. The system places the coordinate
label relative to the witness line of the identified name label and associates the two labels.
Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels
command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for
move, modify, and delete operations.
At any point during the operation of this command you can set the character size or define the
label orientation. The line spacing for the labels is 0.25 times the active character size. You can
select RESET at any time to identify another item or select another label type.
1. Select the Coordinate Label command.
The system activates the Coordinate Label form.
2. Select the desired coordinate Label Graphics option to specify the placement location on the
leader line for the coordinates.
The active option is highlighted.
3. Select one of the Supplementary Text Options.
4. Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of special text
5. Select from the display list to specify the supplementary text to be added to the coordinate
label.
OR
Select the text block, and key in the desired supplementary text.
These special text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data Manager
section in the PDS Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on defining these
values. Some of these options are only valid when labeling a specific coordinate value, such
as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation.
If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation coordinate, the system
indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels to have the elevation of
the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated when selected in conjunction with the
Prefix or Suffix for elevation.
If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted end which is used for
the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half gasket separation. For bolted nozzles, the
connect point location is at the face-of-flange so it is not necessary to compensate for
gasket separation. This command verifies that you have selected a bolted end of a piping
component, a pipe, an instrument component, or a nozzle.
If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation of the
structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

Revision Markers
If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation of the
concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
6. Toggle the appropriate lock option to on or off as desired.
7. Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, Elevation) corresponding to the type of coordinate
label to be placed from the bottom of the form. You can select any combination of
coordinates.
The active coordinate label is displayed in the message area.
8. Identify Coordinate Location.
Place a data point over an element or snap to a keypoint to identify the label location.
9. Accept/Reject.
Press <D> to accept the highlighted element, or press <R> to reject and make another
selection.
10. Enter Data Pt 2.
Place a series of data points to identify the vertices of the reference line running from the
coordinate location to the label location. You can press <R> to back up and replace the
previous vertex. The leader line rubber- bands, stretching with you until the next data point
is placed.
11. Accept Leader Line or Reset.
Select Accept at any point to complete the reference line and set the label location.
For the Label Only graphics option, the system only prompts for the location of the
text.
The system places the label at the specified location.

Revision Markers
12. Select an option from the bottom of the form to manipulate, modify, add or delete coordinate
labels placed in the drawing view(s).
The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as
the leader line).
13. Place a second data point to place the label at the new location.
Automatic Labels
This option selects label(s) to be placed automatically in one or more drawing views. It can also
be used to label the contents of a fence and to define component search criteria to automatically
label only certain elements.
The following rules apply to any labels specified to a include a circle or a circle with a bisector
line as the label enclosure.
 You specify the circle diameter in absolute terms, for example 1/2", in the Label Description
Library Manager when the label is created or revised. If the circle diameter is undefined, the
circle is created in the same manner as the current practice.
 If the label's text does not include a dash and the text fits within the circle defined for that
label, the label's text is placed center-justified with respect to the center of the circle.
 If the label's text does not include a dash but the text does not fit within the circle defined for
that label, the label's text is placed left-justified with respect to the circle and the right side of
the circle is opened for the text.

Revision Markers
 If the label's text includes a dash, the text is broken into two lines. The top line is the text
that precedes the dash and the lower line is the text that follows the dash. The dash itself is
not included within the label.
In determining whether or not the text fits within the circle, .25 times the text width is added to
the length.
The following rules apply to any labels specified to a include a rectangle as the label enclosured.
 The length of the rectangle is determined by the actual length of the label's text for that
specific label - not the maximum length of the label's text, as defined in the Label Description
Library. This length is padded by .25 times the text width.
 The label's text is left-justified for multi-line labels.
Labels can include an angle such as the bend angle of a piping component to be displayed in
degrees and minutes, including any decimal attributes, on the basis of the angular format. This
format is specified on the Angular/Slope Label/Readout form in the Project Data Manager.
Active Leader Line Off/On --- Set to On to place the leader line defined with the Define Active
Leader Line option on either the Coordinate Labels form or the Name Labels form. Set to Off
to use the leader line defined in the label description library for the selected label.
Search Crit Off/On --- Set on to use a specific search criteria defined with the Define Search
Criteria option which restricts the elements to be automatically labeled based on database
attributes.
Label Fence Contents (on page 231) --- Places a fence and labels the items inside the fence.
The Label Fence Contents command is discussed in the next section.
Define Component Search Criteria (see "Search Criteria - Component Form" on page 109) ---
Initiates a search for specific components, and labels those that are found.
Orient Active Label --- Specifies the angle at which the label will be placed. You may select
Horizontal, Vertical, or key in the angle.

Revision Markers
Select Drawing View and/or Select the drawing view(s) to be labeled

Label Type from the Drawing Views list at the top of the
form, then select the label type(s) to be
placed from the Label Types list. Select
Accept to process the request. The system
places the specified label(s) at a location
near the low or high range of the labeled
item and displays the message Automated
Label Placement Complete.
 You can use the Move Label or Modify Label option in the Update Labels, Name Labels or
Coordinate Labels commands to move the labels after placement.
 The Automatic Labels command places leader lines automatically based on the range of the
first element of the equipment occurrence. The command will not place a leader line when
the first element of the equipment occurrence is a datum point. A datum point is a point
string and has no range.
For example, with the following workflow, the command will not place a leader line:
 Place a cylinder.
 Add a datum point.
 Delete the cylinder.
 Add another cylinder to the datum point.
This workflow makes the datum point the first element of the new equipment occurrence, so
no leader line will be placed.

Revision Markers
Label Fence Contents

This option is used to define a specific portion of a drawing by placing a fence to automatically
label the fence contents. The depth of the fence is controlled by the depth of the drawing view.
You can annotate groups of components that require similar label types and leader line
configurations.
1. Select the Label Fence Contents from the Automatic Labels form.
2. Identify First Fence Point.
Place a data point to identify the starting location of the area to be fenced for labeling.
3. Identify Second Fence Point.
Place another data point in the opposite corner to complete the fence.
4. Select Drawing View and/or Label Type.
Place a data point to select the label type to be placed, and select Accept.
The system automatically places the selected label within the fenced area, and displays the
message Automated Label Placement Complete.
Revise Text
This option completely replaces the part of the label that is user-defined text. This option is also
used to replace text in a non-associative label which was created with the MicroStation Place
Text command. You cannot revise labels which are completely formed from attribute data or
predefined text.
1. Select the Revise Text option from the Update Labels form.
2. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap).
Place a data point or snap to identify the label to be revised.
3. User Defined Text Label - Keyin Text.
Key in the text string to replace the user-defined portion of the identified label.
If the name label being revised is associative, the system re-prompts for the text. The system
substitutes the entered text for the user-defined part of the label. The label is re-formed
based on the attribute data and the label definition in the Label Description Library.
An error message is displayed if the label text was created from formatted attribute
data and pre-defined text.
For associative name labels, this requires a change to the data structure of the label in order
to include the position and length of the user-specified text within the label.

Revision Markers
The Search Criteria - Component Form

from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Component form is
displayed.
This form specifies which component attributes are restricted for the report. The default is no
search criteria (that is, no restrictions --- all component attributes are reported). The most
commonly reported component attributes are available as form options, but you are not
criteria should be defined separately for each category, such as Piping Component, Instrument
Component, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support.
form.

Revision Markers
The search criteria defined through the Piping Component, Instrument Component,
Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support buttons will not be displayed as a single list. To see the search
criteria defined through these buttons, select the appropriate button.
Component --- Displays the restricted component attributes once they have been defined.
Commodity Name --- Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity name
attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Commodity Code --- Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity code
Fabrication Category --- Restricts the reported components by means of the frabrication
category attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Component Group Number --- Restricts the reported components by means of the component
group number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the
specification.
Tag/Component Number --- Restricts the reported components by means of the
tag/component number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete
the specification.
Other --- Displays the entity options.
Piping Component --- Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that
are associated with piping components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select
specification.
Instrument Component --- Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes
that are associated with instruments components. From the displayed list, select an attribute.
Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to
complete the specification.

Revision Markers
Piping/Tubing --- Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are
associated with piping or tubing components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then
select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the
specification.
Pipe Support --- Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are
associated with pipe support attributes. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select
specification.
Clear ALL Component Search Criteria --- Deletes the restricted component attributes once
they have been defined.
specification.
remove a line, click RemoveSearch Definition, select the line to be removed, and click Accept.
1. Select Component Search Criteria.
The Search Criteria - Component form is displayed.
3. Select Operator.

Revision Markers

SECTION 10
Update Annotation Labels

This command is very similar to the Update Labels command that is available in the graphics
environment of Drawing Manager (PD_Draw). Update Annotation Labels uses the same rules to
update labels that are used in the Update Labels command. Refer to Update Labels (on page
275) for more details.
Selecting this command activates the Update Annotation Labels form, which prompts you to
select the drawing type for which you wish to update annotation labels.
Selecting and accepting a drawing type from this list activates the list of available drawings of
the selected drawing type.
Selecting and accepting a drawing from the list activates the Update Annotation Labels job
submission form. The Update Annotation Labels activity may be submitted immediately, or you
may delay submission until a specified day and time. To submit the job immediately, leave the

Update Annotation Labels
toggle in its default position: Submit Immediately. To specify a delayed submission, switch the
toggle to its Submission is Delayed setting, and specify the desired day and time.
When the batch job is processed, it will create three log files in the temp directory:
 udl_log.<drawing type number> contains the environment variables set for the batch
process
 dlupdate.<drawing type number> contains the report of which drawings were updated and
which were not
 dlquelog.<drawing type number> contains messages for any errors that may have been
encountered while processing the drawings being updated
The file extension for each of these log files is the code-listed drawing type value for the drawing
view being processed. For example, the log file extension for files associated with the drawing
type delivered as Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details would be 665, as that
drawing type is number 665 in Standard Note 2000 (Drawing Type).

SECTION 11
Vector Hidden Line Manager

This command activates the Vector Hidden Line Manager form. It is used to create
hidden-line-removed graphics for a specified drawing. The graphics can be created with visible
lines only, or you can create the graphics with both visible and hidden lines. There is also an
option for including or removing reference models. Optional queues, besides the default queue,
can be created and defined. Refer to the Queue Setup section for more information.
First, the system displays the List of Drawing Types and prompts you to select a drawing type.
Once a drawing type is selected and confirmed, the system prompts you to select a drawing
from the List of Drawings.
When the drawing is selected and confirmed, the system activates the main Vector Hidden
Line Manager form.
In order to ensure predictable results, Vector Hidden Line Manager should be run only
when referenced models are not being revised, unless the pre-processor option to copy
referenced models to a temporary working directory is used. More information about this
pre-processing option is available in the next section.
Pre-processing and Post-processing Options

VHL provides some pre-processing and post-processing options which can allow you to
customize your workflow. To use these options, you must modify your pds.cmd file so that it
exports a variable called VHL_PPOPS.
Pre-processing Option
The pre-processing option, if used, forces VHL to copy reference model files into a temporary
working directory before processing begins. This will prevent unpredictable results that could be
obtained by running VHL on model files that were being modified during processing.
To set up this option, you must export the VHL_PPOPS variable with a keyword that specifies
the working directory that will be used to store the reference model files being processed. You
can specify the desired working directory explicitly, or you can assign the system's temp
directory to be the working directory.
Refer to the examples below on how to specify the working directory:
 $ENV{'VHL_PPOPS'}='temp:drive:\explicit\directory\path';
In this case, temp lets the system know that the specified path is to be used as the working
directory.

 $ENV{'VHL_PPOPS'}='temp:drive:\explicit\directory\path savetemp';
The addition of the savetemp variable will cause the system to retain files in the specified
directory instead of automatically deleting them upon completion of the process. This
command can be useful for troubleshooting purposes.
EXAMPLE: $ENV{'VHL_PPOPS'}='temp:c:\vhlfiles savetemp';
 Save and maintain copies of all reference files used when VHL is run on a drawing in the
c:\vhlfiles directory.
In either case, the system creates a subdirectory under the specified temporary directory to
store the copied files. This directory will be named vhltmpaa, where aa is varied to creat a
unique subdirectory. For instance, if the vhltmpaa, vhltmpab, and vhltmpac directories exist, the
next subdirectory to be created would be named vhltmpad.
Post-processing Options
Post-processor options are activated by exporting the VHL_PPOPS variable with any of the
following keywords:
 arc
Forces the system to recreate arcs out of VHL-stroked circular elements.
 backp
Removes the backplane (the invisible back face of a drawn object) and edges parallel to the
viewing direction. If this option is not used, VHL retains edges from these faces even though
they are overlaid by identical edges originating from a matching front face. For example, if
you run VHL with backp enabled, on a view where you are viewing a pipe "end on" so it
looks like a circle) the graphics for the inside edge (the other end of the pipe) will not show
when moving or deleting the circle that represents the pipe in the VHL graphics.
 cell
Regroups all elements that came from one original outermost element (type 2, 18, 19, 23,
and so forth) so that they fall under one cell header. If the original element was a simple
unnested element that was processed into several pieces, they will also be grouped under a
cell header.
This is useful if you intend to edit VHL graphics after the process has been completed. All
PDS-placed EDEN components are drawn "on the fly" based on line information. The last
step EDEN takes prior to placing the component in the model file is to make the graphical
item a cell. When VHL is run, it breaks the cells down into simple geometries for processing.
If the cell option is not used, the final output is the same elements that VHL processed. If the
option is used, items that were cells are again made into cells. For instance, if a gate valve
is processed by VHL without the cell option, the valve will be made up of various line
elements. If you try to move, copy, or in any way modify the "valve," you will only get it one
piece at a time, such as the valve operator stem. If the cell option were used, the valve
could be manipulated as one item.
Cells are named according to the following sequence:
V0001H
V0002H
V0003H
:
V0009H
V000AH
V000BH
V000CH

:
VZZZZH
To avoid naming conflicts, previously existing VHL cells (recognized by the V and H
terminators) are named according to the same convention.
 join
Attempts successive processing iterations (passes) to join fragmented line strings and arcs.
The number of passes is dependent on the VHL resolution. (A resolution of 1000 in
PD_Draw results in one processing pass.)
 min:X
Eliminates any line string with a total viewplane- projected length (in UORs) less than the
value of X, where X is any non-negative integer.
 keep
Keeps the original VHL output file for troubleshooting purposes, and does not overwrite it
with the post- processor output (.pOp) file. By default, the .pOp file is renamed to the final
output file. The .pOp file resides in the same directory as the VHL post- processor output
file.
 links
Retains linkages passed from VHL to the post-processor so you can identify the origin of
each output element. Links option should only be used along with Cell option. Links option
alone does not affect processing. This is useful in troubleshooting. The linkage format is
listed below:
word1 - U bit set, class=0, wtf=7
word2 - 4265 (hex 10A9) before; 4266 after postprocessing
word3 - areano (starting from 1)
word4 - attachmentno (from type 5)
word5 - bandno (starting from 1)
word6 - surface type and surfaceno (low 12 bits)
word7 - 4-byte elementno of header element as shown by EDG
word8 - used only if word7 is large enough to need two words
Total size: 8 words. Fields useful for tracking output elements are areano, attachmentno,
and elementno.
 oldgg
Carry source graphic group numbers onto output elements.This can be used with or without
the cell header option. Be aware that graphic group numbers from different reference files
may not be unique.
 pdslevels
Ignore PD_Draw specified output levels, and carry output levels onto output elements.
Caution:This feature is not supported by PD_Draw. Using this feature invalidates the
current method for controlling VHL graphics, and will result in accumulation of graphics
output from different runs.
For example, using this option, a drawing with piping and equipment reference models using
the delivered categories will have revision clouds and triangles, equipment physical, and
physical not approved pipe supports all on level 10 in the drawing.
This option should be used only when the drawing will NOT be edited again inside
PDS after VHL processing (as when the VHL document will be a deliverable). Running VHL
with this post-processor option should be the last step for creating a deliverable non_PDS
drawing.
 verbose

Displays post-processor statistics.
VHL_PPOPS Command Environment Strings

These are examples of VHL_PPOPS command environment strings from the pds.cmd file with
explanations:
$ENV{'VHL_PPOPS'}='arc backp cell join min:5 temp:c:\vhlfile';
 Invokes arc restroking, backplane elimination, cell re-creation, joining of partial elements,
deletes anything less than 5 UORs in length and creates temporary working copies of
reference files in c:file.
 This is a typical user configuration.
ENV{'VHL_PPOPS'}='arc backp cell join min:5 temp:c:\vhlfile savetemp keep links verbose';
 Invokes settings as above, with the addition of troubleshooting options. The savetemp
option is added to keep the copied reference files after processing. The keep option
maintains the .pOp file. Links allows tracing of element origins, and verbose provides
statistical information which may be useful.
 This is a typical troubleshooting configuration.
Queues --- Displays a scrolling list of the queues available for performing the hidden line
removal process.
Refer to the Queue Setup section for information on creating and defining queues.
Reference Model Display by System --- Indicates that VHL should use reference file and
category settings you selected in the Project Setup. These settings are used on the basis of
disciplines within the drawing types.
If you do not revise a given discipline within a drawing type in Project Setup, VHL uses the
active display setting for each of that discipline's reference models in the drawing views, as
defined in the drawing graphical environment.
Category control will not be restored to its initial state if changed. You must reset
categories manually after each run, if necessary.
Reference Model Display by User --- Indicates that at the time of submission, you will select
the reference file and category settings to be used. The selected settings and file will be applied
to all views in all drawings submitted to VHL for processing.
When you select this option, PDS displays the active settings for the first view in the first
drawing, as a starting point. You can revise the display settings ON or OFF as required for the

various reference files and categories. What you set will apply to all views in all drawings and
will apply only to this one VHL submission. It will not affect the display in the graphical
environment.
Reference Model Display by Drawing Settings --- Processes the drawings in a WYSIWYG
(What You See Is What You Get) fashion but it only consider the levels that are turned ON/OFF.
In addition, it does not respect the level symbology setting (color, line weigth,style, and so forth)
of the drawing views.
This option deals only with turning level display on and off, not with level symbology. VHL
visible edges will always respect the color of the respective elements in the model. VHL hidden
edges will display using symbology defined for the drawing view. Thus, you cannot define
different symbology for hidden edges of different disciplines in a drawing view.
Default VHL Drawings/Symbology based VHL Drawings --- Toggle Default VHL Drawings to
output VHL drawings with the default VHL symbology, or Symbology based VHL Drawings to
output VHL drawings based on different search criteria. Refer to Symbology Based VHL
Drawings (on page 244) for more information.
All Drawing Views/Drawing Views by User --- Processes all drawing views or lets you specify
the individual drawing views you want processed.
Plot after VHL/No Plotting --- Toggle to Plot after VHL to plot the drawing after completion of
VHL processing. Selecting the plotting option activates the Plot Manager form that allows you to
specify plotting parameters for the active drawing.
Visible Only/Visible and Hidden --- Toggle to display visible lines only or both visible and
hidden vector lines.
Submission is Delayed/Submit Immediately --- Toggle to complete processing vector hidden
line immediately or delay job submission to batch.
Cleanup Off/On --- Toggle On to cleanup lines hidden by the object itself or Off to not perform
cleanup. Lines of one object hidden by another object will still be shown.
Resolution --- Select and key in the desired resolution value. The higher the resolution value
the longer processing takes, but the output is of better quality. The recommended starting value
is 5,000, and the recommended range is 3000 to 10000.
Day Hr: Min --- Displays the day and time for delayed transmission. These fields are active only
when the submission toggle is set to Submission is Delayed.

Select Drawing Type Select the drawing type for hidden line
processing, and select Accept.
Select Drawing Select the drawing or drawings to be used
for vector-hidden-line-removal processing,
and then Accept the drawing.
Accept to Submit for Accept the selected drawings for
Processing processing.
Accept to Submit, or Modify Select the appropriate toggle to set the
Submit Data desired parameters, then Accept the
displayed parameter settings.
The system performs the vector hidden line process and places it in your drawing. A message
indicating the time the job was submitted for processing is displayed if delay submission is
selected. The list of drawings is then re-displayed for another selection if desired.
The Vector Hidden Line Manager will automatically compress each drawing once the
previous vector hidden-line removed graphics have been deleted and prior to initiating the vector

hidden-line process for the drawing, reducing the disk space required for large batch requests. It
will also reduce the size of the plot files that are generated after a vector hidden-line process by
the Plot Manager outside of the graphics environment.
To view your hidden line drawing after the vector hidden line process is complete, you must turn
off the drawing view display. Refer to Hidden Line Graphics (see "Viewing Hidden Line
Graphics" on page 177) for more information.
Symbology Based VHL Drawings

This option allows you to output VHL drawings based on search criteria set with the Search
Criteria for VHL command.
Create the required search criteria. Refer to Search Criteria for VHL (on page 249)for
information on creating VHL search criteria for Piping and Equipment.
Edit the file DrwSymMap.mdb in Microsoft Access.
Enter data in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap and DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc tables in
Microsoft Access.
Edit the PDS.CMD file to include the following line:
$ENV{'VHL_PPOPS'} = 'hidpdslev pdslevels';
This option can affect the way that regular VHL drawings are processed. To avoid
inaccuracies, be sure to remove this line from the PDS.CMD file, or use a separate copy of the
PDS.CMD file when processing Symbology based VHL drawings.
The DrwSymMap.mdb file is located in the product directory: \win32app\ingr\PDDRAW\sample.
The DrwSymMap.mdb file should be copied to the project directory of the respective PDS
project for generating Symbology based VHL Drawings and edited accordingly.
1. In PD_Shell, select Drawing Manager > Vector Hidden Line Manager.
2. Select the VHL drawings to create.

3. On the Vector Hidden Line Manager form, set the Default VHL Drawings / Symbology
based VHL Drawings toggle to Symbology based VHL Drawings.

4. Set the Visible Only / Visible and Hidden toggle to Visible and Hidden if you want to
display the hidden lines as well as the visible lines.
5. Click Accept.
The system creates the new VHL drawings in the vhl subdirectory under the drawings
directory. For example, if the drawings directory is ~\dwg\665 for piping perspectives, the
new VHL drawing is created in the ~\dwg\665\vhl subdirectory.
This new drawing does not behave like a default VHL drawing. Hence, this step
should be the final one in creating the drawings.
Drawings in the ~\vhl subdirectory are intended to be standalone MicroStation drawings,
and are not updated by subsequent modifications to PDS models.
Drawing Type and Symbology Map

This section provides details for using the DrwSymMap.mdb file. This Microsoft Access file
contains two database tables, SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap and DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc,
which control the symbology based VHL drawing creation. Mapping the drawing types controls
where the VHL drawings are generated, as well as the search criteria used to generate the
drawings.
Drawing Type Map Association

This section provides details for using the DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc table.
Attributes
The following table shows the attributes used in the Drawing Type and Symbology Map, along
with their data types and maximum length.

Attribute Data Type Length Remarks

Name
Drawingtype smallint 2 Codelisted value
MapNumber character 30
The Drawing Type attribute is the codelisted value for the desired drawing type. The Map
Number attribute is a user- defined name that is used in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table.
Sample Map
Drawingtype MapNumber
=======================================
663 PipeOneLine
665 PipePerspective
Search Criteria Symbology Map

his section provides details for using the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table. This Microsoft
Access file controls the symbology associated with the search criteria used to create symbology
based VHL drawings.
The search criteria for the Piping and Equipment disciplines are generated using the Search
Criteria for VHL command. Refer to Search Criteria for VHL (on page 249) for information on
generating these search criteria.
The search criteria for EE Raceway and FrameWorks Plus must be entered directly into the
SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table. Refer to EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria (on page 247)
and FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria (on page 248) for information on generating these
search criteria.
Attributes
Attribute Name Data Type Length Remarks
MapNumber character 30 Map Number from the
Drawing Type table
SequenceNumber integer 4 discipline_index_no from
pdtable_112
DisciplineIndexNum smallint 2
SearchCriteriaNumb character 24 search_number from
er pdtable_145
Color integer 4 Codelisted from
Microstation color table
Level integer 4 MicroStation Level
Sample Map
MapNumber SeqNum DiscIndxNum SrchCritNum Color Level
===============================================================
PipeOneLine 1 1 vhlpip1 2 2
PipeOneLine 2 1 vhlpip2 4 4
PipePerspective 1 1 vhlpip2 3 5
PipePerspective 2 1 vhlpipl 6 10

EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria

The search criteria for any EE Raceway drawings to be output as symbology based VHL
drawings must be entered in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table directly.
You can define Raceway serach criteria such that all elements belonging to a particular one-line
type or system are grouped together, or all elements derived from a specific table in the
Raceway reference database are grouped together.
One-line Type Search Criteria

The syntax for one-line type search criteria is:
[any text]_OLT_[One-line type number]
where,
[any text] is any text string.
[One-line type number] is a number referring to the desired one-line type
from the ol_type table in the re_xxx schema.
Examples of one-line type search criteria include:
Tray_OLT_1 (searching for trays),
Cond_OLT_3 (searching for conduits), or
All_Duct_Banks_OLT_5 (searching for duct banks).
The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the OLT keyword.
For search criteria based on the one-line type, the software searches for all the children of that
one-line type, as well as the one-line type's children's children, and places these elements on
the indicated level using the specified color. For example, if the search criteria defined refers to
the one-line type "Tray," the symbologies for all the Raceway connect points (RCPs) and
one-lines belonging to this one-line type are changed in the VHL drawing. Also, the symbologies
of all the Straights, Fittings and other children of the RCPs and one-lines are changed.
Entity Number Based Search Criteria

The syntax for search criteria based on the entity number is:
[any text]_ENT_[Entity number]
where,
 [any text] is any text string.
 [Entity number] is the value of the entitynum property in the mscatalog table of the the
re_xxx schema.
Examples of entity number based search criteria include:
OneLines_ENT_204 (searching for all one-lines,
centerlines only), or
LightFixtures_ENT_250 (searching for all light fixtures).
 The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the OLT keyword.
 The ENT search criteria cannot be applied to all the tables listed in the mscatalog table.
System Type Number Based Search Criteria

Each one-line in EE Raceway (such as trays, conduits, etc.) can belong to a system or set of
systems. Thus, the tray or conduit represented by the one-line carries cables belonging to the
system to which the tray or conduit belongs. If a tray or conduit belongs to more than one
system, one of systems in the set is called the active system, and the rest of the systems are

called sub-systems. For more information on systems, refer to the EE Raceway Modeling
Reference Guide. For each element, the system checks whether a search criterion has been
defined for the active system to which the element belongs. If so, the system changes the color
and level of the element to match that assigned to the system.
The syntax for search criteria based on system type number is:
[any text]_SYS_[System type number]
where,
 [any text] is any text string.
 [System type number] is the value of the system_num property in the ee_system table of the
the re_xxx schema.
Examples of system type number based search criteria include:
Control_SYS_1 (searching for control systems), or
HighVoltage_SYS_3 (searching for high voltage systems).
The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the SYS keyword.
Sample Raceway Search Criteria Map

==================================================================
RwayPerspective 1 5 Tray_OLT_1 3 5
RwayPerspective 2 5 Cond_OLT_3 6 10
RwayPerspective 3 5 LitFix_ENT_250 7 12
FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria

The search criteria for any FrameWorks Plus drawings to be output as symbology based VHL
drawings must be entered in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table directly.
You can define FrameWorks+ search criteria such that all the elements that belong to the same
category can be grouped together. The valid categories and their corresponding keywords are:
Category Keyword
Beam BEAM
Column COLUMN
Brace BRACE
Area AREA
member
Arc member ARC
Volume VOLUME
member
Sample FrameWorks Plus Search Criteria Map

=================================================================
StrucPerspective 1 3 BEAM 3 5
StrucPerspective 2 3 COLUMN 6 10
StrucPerspective 3 3 VOLUME 7 12

SECTION 12
Search Criteria for VHL

This command allows you to define the search criteria used to create symbology based VHL
drawings. Refer to Symbology Based VHL Drawings (on page 244) for more information.
When you select the Search Criteria for VHL command from the Drawing Management form,
the Search Criteria Data form is displayed.
Use this form to create, copy, revise or delete VHL search criteria for piping and equipment.
This command only assigns search criteria for Piping and Equipment models. Search
criteria for HVAC, FrameWorks Plus and EE Raceway must be defined directly in the Access
database.
Create --- Displays the Search Criteria Data Creation form, which adds a new record of a VHL
search criteria file in the Access database.
Copy --- Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which copies the record of an
existing VHL search criteria file from the Access database and copies the corresponding data
file.
Revise --- Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which modifies an existing
record of a VHL search criteria file in the Access database.
Delete --- Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing VHL search criteria file as well
as its associated record in the Access database.

Search Criteria Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria Data
This form creates a VHL search criteria data file in a specified directory. It also creates a
corresponding record in the Access database.
File Specification --- The file name (up to 14 characters) of the search criteria data file to be
created.
settings.
File Node --- The nodename of the system on which the search criteria data file is located. This
(on page 105).
Revise AND/OR Relation --- Displays a list of And/Or relationships

Equipment Search Criteria --- Displays the Search Criteria - Equipment/Nozzle form, which
defines the equipment VHL search criteria.
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, click Create.
The Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed.
Accept.
After including any models or search criteria for the search criteria data file, be
of the specifications, however, the search criteria data file is not actually created until you
click Accept on the Search Criteria Data Creation form.
Search Criteria Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria
Data File Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing search criteria data file. It also copies an existing search criteria
corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.

File Specification --- The file name, up to 14 characters, of the search criteria file to be created.
settings.
(on page 105).
Define Volume --- Displays the Volume Definition form, which specifies the coordinates of a
design volume cube for reporting. For more information, see the "Define Volume Form" section
in the Report Manager User's Guide.
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, select Copy or Revise.
The Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed, with a list of available data files.
2. From the displayed list, select a data file to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.
4. Select additional options as needed to define the report search criteria data. Then click
Accept.

Search Criteria Deletion Form



SECTION 13
Annotating Drawings
These commands are used to place annotation graphics in the drawing to fully document the
drawing views. You can also update existing labels to reflect changes to the model.
Mass Annotation (on page 256) --- Automatically labels one drawing view at a time. ASCII files
control which object types are available for labeling, and how these objects are to be labeled.
Place Labels (on page 263) --- Activates a form that is a synthesis of the older Name Label and
Coordinate Label commands. If you prefer, you may still use the older Name Label and
Coordinate Label commands to place your labels.
Equipment Center Lines (see "Equipment Centerlines" on page 271) --- Automatically places
center lines on equipment types that have been designated to receive them. ASCII files control
which object types receive centerline labels, how these labels are placed.
Update Labels (on page 275) --- Updates displayable attribute drawing labels and coordinate
labels to agree with changes in the model. It can also be used to reposition labels or edit
user-defined text in a label.
Revision Markers (on page 201) --- Places a revision triangle or revision cloud on a drawing with
the specified type of revision marker to be placed.
Display Report (on page 202) --- Places a report in a drawing. It activates the Display Report
form which contains a list of the available drawing reports.
Place Cell (on page 204) --- Places a user-defined cell in a drawing.
Place Text and Line (on page 205) --- Places user-defined text and leader lines.
Overlay Drawing (on page 207) --- Attaches another orthographic drawing as a reference file to
the active drawing to share drawing annotations between related drawings.
Review Attribute (on page 208) --- Displays the attribute values of the identified piping
component or segment, or of the selected equipment item or nozzle. It also displays selected
attribute information for MDR, HVAC, and raceway components. This option displays user data
associated with the identified element and PDS markers placed in the file.
Measure Distance (on page 208) --- Measures the distance between any two components, or
inquires the location of any component in terms of the project's Plant Coordinate System.

Annotating Drawings
Drawing Annotation Symbology (on page 210) --- Updates the active line weight, symbology,
color, and text size values according to definitions made during project setup.
Name Label (on page 211) --- Selects the type of label to be placed. This command is used to
place annotation graphics, text, and labels on the drawing view.
Coordinate Label (on page 220) --- Selects the coordinate values to be labeled and to specify
the form of the coordinate label.
Automatic Labels (on page 228) --- Labels one or more drawing views automatically with the
specified type of label. It can also be used to label the contents of a fence and to define
component search criteria to restrict the elements to be labeled.
Mass Annotation
The Mass Annotation command allows simple, automatic placement of annotation labels on
selected drawing views. You select from a list the drawing types and the objects to be labeled,
then you select the desired type of label for each object.
Both the Reference Data Manager and the Project Administrator modules have setup issues
that are concerned with the Mass Annotation command; both modules contain a form used to
control aspects of automatic label placement. The form used in the Label Library Manager in
PD_Data is used to control Mass Annotation settings for name labels, and the form used in
PD_Project controls Mass Annotation settings for coordinate labels.
This form allows you to specify the following options for use with the Mass Annotation command
in PD_Draw:
 Are Previously Labeled Objects to be Labeled?
This option allows you to prevent labeling of objects that have already been labeled, if
desired. If the setting to re-label values that are incorrect is used, the system will update the
label value, then move on to the next label.
 Are Objects Clipped by Drawing View Bounds to be Labeled?
Allows you to prevent labeling of objects only partially included within the drawing view. An
option is provided to label only objects whose labeling point is within the bounds of the
active drawing view.
 Are Objects Hidden by Other Objects to be Labeled?

Annotating Drawings
Allows you to prevent labeling of objects that would not be partially or totally visible after
vector-hidden lines have been processed. Options include labeling of objects whose labeling
points are visible, not labeling partially-hidden objects, and not labeling completely hidden
objects.
Each label definition form in the Label Description Library of Reference Data Manager has a
Mass Annotation Data option. Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference
Guide for more information.
A Mass Annotation Data option is also available while defining drawing seed data or individual
drawing files' data in Project Administrator. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project)
Reference Guide for more information.
The Mass Annotation command uses Code List 31 (Object Type) to control some aspects of
automatic label placement. The command is also dependent on the presence of the following
ASCII files in the project directory:
 <yyy>_object.dwg (where yyy is eqp or in)
 labels.<xxx> (where xxx is the numerical code-listed value of the drawing types being
annotated)
These files control which object types are to be labeled, and which types of labels are placed on
those drawing types. These files are described below, and sample files (applicable to drawing
type 665) are delivered to the project directory. You will need to create similar files for each
drawing type that you wish to be available in the Mass Annotation command.
Which object types in a given drawing view will be available for labeling by users of the
Mass Annotation command?
The eqp_object.dwg file lists the equipment object types (ranging 120-140, as listed in Standard
Note 31: Object Type) for which the Mass Annotation command allows you to place labels. The
in_object.dwg file lists the instrumentation object types available to the Mass Annotation
command. Object types other than those listed in Standard Note 31 will not be available for use
by the Mass Annotation command.
These files also specify the equipment parametric form numbers for each object available for
Mass Annotation.
!Object Type Parametric Definition Forms
!----------------------------------------------------------------
120 A001,A003 !Equipment Platform
124 A051 !Equipment Handrail
128 A015,A016 !Equipment Penetration
130 A041 !Equipment Stair
135 A021,A031 !Equipment Ladder
140 A061,A063 !Equipment Davit
How will specific object types be labeled?

The labels.<xxx> files are named such that the file extensions are the numerical code-listed
values of the drawing types (from Standard Note 2000) being annotated. For instance, the
delivered sample labels.665 corresponds with the drawing type delivered as Piping
Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details because that drawing type is defined as code 665
in Standard Note 2000.

Annotating Drawings
The labels.<xxx> files define which label numbers and search criteria apply to a particular object
type (from Standard Note 31) in the particular drawing type being annotated. For each piping
object type, there are two possible entries: one without search criteria and one with search
criteria defined in Report Manager (PD_Report).
 For piping segments, only the longest segment for any given line ID will be labeled.
 Search criteria is valid only for piping object types. For more information on creating search
criteria, refer to the Search Criteria Data Form.
The labels.<xxx> files follow the rules listed below:
 Name labels are specified by the number given to them in the Label Description Library.
 Coordinate labels are specified the character C.
 Labels can be placed individually or in combination according to the following convention:
 A comma (,) specifies single label placement; use a comma (,) between all single label
specifications. Examples: the string 2, 7, 10 specifies that name labels 2, 7, and 10 are
available for placement for that object type; the string 5, C specifies that the single name
label 5 and a coordinate label (designated later in this list as C) are available for placement
for that object type.
 A dash (-) specifies the availability of all the labels in the given range. Example: the string
10-15 specifies the availability of name labels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15 for that particular
object.
 A plus (+) specifies the availability of a combined name label and coordinate label. Example:
the string 5, 12+C specifies availability of name label 5, and the combination of name label
12 and a coordinate label.
Note that the coordinate label portion of a combination label may be rejected by the
Reject Label command, described later in this chapter, but the entire combination label will
be rejected if the name label porton is rejected.
 SC = specifies availability of labels for piping items matching the given search criteria
definition. Example: the string SC = YOUR_SEARCH_CRIT_NAME, 1, C specifies that all
piping components meeting the given search criteria will receive both a name label 1 and a
coordinate label.
The sample labels.665 file is listed below:

Annotating Drawings
!Drawing Type = 665

!ObjectType Search Criteria Number Label Numbers
!----------------------------------------------------------------
!Piping Object Types
205 1 !Piping Segment
210 2,7,10-11,C !Piping Component
215 3 + C !Piping Specialty
217 8 !Pipes
220 13, 15 !Piping Support
250 5 !In-Line Instrument
255 5 !On-Line Instrument
260 5 !Off-Line Instrument
!Equipment Object Types
101 12 + C !Equipment Group
110 6, C !Equipment Nozzle
!EERWAY Object Types
300 17, C !EERWAY Connect Point
The information in the above sample file controls label placement for both
piping and equipment object types in drawings of type 665. For examples of
the previously explained convention, refer to the line describing the labels
to be placed for piping object type 210:
210 2, 7, 10-11, C !Piping Component
This type of piping component can be annotated by name labels 2, 7, 10, 11, and a coordinate
label.
Label Only --- Places the label only (no leader lines). When using this command and the drag
mode, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You may then use the
data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the desired location of the
label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button. (Coordinate label justification
settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.)


Annotating Drawings
 L = left
 R = right
 T = top
 B = bottom
 C = center
justification.
Reject Labeling Point --- Rejects the default labeling point on the object being labeled. You will
be prompted to specify a new labeling point.
Reject Label --- Rejects the label being placed, places a rejected label marker indicating that
the label has been rejected, and continues on to label the rest of the selected objects. The
system places rejected labels on a level 63 (delivered as Mass Annotation Rejected Labels).
The system, upon subsequent labeling operations, will not attempt to replace a rejected label
until the rejected label marker is deleted using the Delete Element command.
Skip Current Label --- Bypasses the label being placed, and continues on to label the rest of
the selected objects. The system, upon subsequent labeling operations, will attempt to place a
label at this same point.
Continually selecting the Skip Current Label option will cycle through all possible mass
annotation label placement points.
Window Center to Item --- Shifts the window center to correspond with the placement point of
the active object, centering the object on your screen.
Active Working View --- Allows selection of the working view to be displayed. Select the
number of the view you wish to be the working view for annotation. The view numbers are
equivalent to the Microstation view numbers.
1. Select the Mass Annotation command from the Annotation palette.

Annotating Drawings
The system displays the Drawing Bounds form and prompts you to select the desired
drawing view(s) to be annotated.
2. Select the desired drawing view(s) you wish to annotate, then Accept the highlighted
selections.
The system displays the Select Object and Label Type form and prompts you to select an
object type to be labeled.
3. Select the object type to be annotated.

Annotating Drawings
The system updates the form to display the object types available for mass annotation of the
selected drawing type and prompts you to select labels for that object type, or to select
another drawing type.
4. Select the appropriate labels for the object types to be annotated, then Accept the
highlighted selections and activate Mass Annotation's Place Labels form. The system
processes the mass annotation data, and activates a variation of the Place Labels form.
You will be prompted to perform the next step in the label placement sequence for the type
of label being placed. (If leader lines are available for that type of label, you will be prompted
to place the second data point; the first label data point is label point 1 by default, as defined
for that equipment in the Equipment Modeling module.)
5. At this point you may modify, reject, or skip the active label. To place and accept a label,
place the desired data points to define the leader line, then Accept the active label.
The system determines the next label placement point, and prompts you to perform the next
step in the label placement sequence.

Annotating Drawings
The Mass Annotation command uses placement point 1 as the default placement
point for labels' leader lines. You can override this setting during placement.
Place Labels
The Place Labels command is a synthesis of the older Name Label and Coordinate Label
commands found in previous versions of the Drawing Manager module. The Name Label and
Coordinate Label commands are still available for you to use if you so prefer.
Labels placed on equipment items that are not associated with a Datum Point may not
act as expected when the Update Labels command is used. If the view scale is altered, or if the
Datum Point is relocated, the label will maintain its previous distance and relationship to the
Datum Point.
Label Only --- Places the label only (no leader lines). You can cancel the label placement with
the reset button.


Annotating Drawings
Coordinate Sequence --- Displays the current sequence in which coordinate values will be
defined. The default sequence is Easting, Northing, Elevation. To change this sequence, place a
data point in this field; this activates a list of possible sequences for you to choose from.
Select the desired sequence by placing a data point on it. Any coordinate labels created prior to
this enhancement will be considered by the Update Labels command to have been defined as
Easting, Northing, Elevation.
Supplementary Text Options --- You can specify that the coordinate label be created with
supplementary text. This text supplements the basic coordinate label, which consists of the
coordinate value, the coordinate axis short description, and the coordinate system short
description. The supplementary text can be placed as a prefix or suffix.
Supplementary text may be edited or added in the drawing's seed data (Type 63) through the
Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference
Guide for more information regarding supplementary text.
Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of special text
The prefix and suffix text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data Manager
section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for information on defining
these values. Some of these options are only valid when labeling a specific coordinate value,
such as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation.
Bottom of Pipe --- If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation
coordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels to have
the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated when selected in
conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation.
Face of Flange --- If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted end of a
piping item which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half gasket separation.
For equipment nozzles, the datum point location is at the face-of-flange, so it is not necessary to
compensate for gasket separation. This command verifies that you have selected a bolted end
of a piping component, a pipe, an instrument component, or a nozzle.
Top of Steel --- If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation
of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
You may place a top-of-steel coordinate label using sparse model graphics. If you do so, you
must snap to a structural member for which the center line represents top-of-steel.
Top of Concrete --- If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the highest
elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

Annotating Drawings
Top of Platform --- If you select Top of Platform, the coordinate value labeled is the elevation
of the plane of the platform on which the grating or checkered plate is supported.
If a structural model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules will apply:
The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the structural component, rather than the
elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a horizontal component
is not identified in conjunction with this feature.
Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or the
platform which it describes.
If an equipment model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules will apply:
The elevation option for the coordinates will be automatically enabled.
The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the equipment's parametric shape, rather
than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a horizontal
component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.
Bottom of Duct --- If you select Bottom of Duct, the coordinate value labeled is the lowest
elevation of the HVAC duct rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
Text Drag Off/On --- Defines if the label text is placed using drag mode or not. After the leader
line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode. Moving the text does not
affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the dragged text, select Accept.
Line Term Off/On --- Set to determine whether or not the witness line for a coordinate label has
a line terminator.
The line terminator specified in the RDB for coordinate labels is used if the line terminator
is on. If you choose a witness line without a line terminator, a gap is left between the location
being labeled and the end of the witness line. The plot size of the gap is defined in the RDB.
Axis Lock On/Off --- When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for placement of
coordinate labels with as many as four vertices. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the
vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either the horizontal or
vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be locked to a drawing axis.
Activation of the axis lock limits you to a leader line with only two vertices, and deactivation
enables you to place a leader line with as many as four vertices.
selected label.
Name Label Only/With Coordinate Label --- Toggle to place a name label only, or to place a
coordinate label and a name label as one operation. Both the coordinate label and the name
label created with this command can be updated using the Update Labels commands.
 The text for the coordinate labels and the name labels are associated for move, modify, and
delete operations. However, the data structure of the combination label distinguishes
labels.
 The text representing the name label is created on the MicroStation level associated with
the drawing category for name labels. The text representing the name coordinate and the

Annotating Drawings
remaining graphics are created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing
category for coordinate labels.
Name Label option to specify whether the name label is placed above or below the coordinate
label.
With Active Angle/Along Leader Line --- Set to With Active Angle to specify that the label
text be oriented along the active angle, or set to Along Leader Line to specify that the text be
Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.
 L = left
 R = right
 T = top
 B = bottom
 C = center
justification.
Text Size --- The Text Size fields display the text size that is to be used with the selected label.
When a label is selected, the text size fields are automatically populated with the values that are
to be used for that label. If the text size is read from the Label Description Library or from the
Type 63 data, the Text Size fields are read-only. If the Text Size fields are populated with the
active text size, the fields can be edited.
Active Angle --- Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Set the With
Coordinate Label --- Disables name label options on the form.

Annotating Drawings
Other --- Activates a list of other types of labels that may be placed.
The following four labels (between Coordinate Label and Other) are defined per drawing
type in the lab_button.dwg file during project setup. This file resides in the project directory. A
sample lab_button.dwg file is shown below:
# This file maps the command buttons on the Label Placement
# form in the Place Label Command to a Label Number in the
# Label Description Library.
# There are a set of special labels described below that
# do not refer to a specific label number but a set of
# labels.
# Special Label Number
# SP1, "Piping Line Number"
# SP2, "Component Tag"
# SP3, "Piping Reducer"
# SP4, "Piping Piece Mark"
# You May define a Maximum of 4 Label Numbers per Drawing Type
# Define Drawing Type to Which Buttons Apply
# Define Label Numbers and Text for Buttons
# Label Number, Text to Display on Button
# (MAXIMUM of 20 Characters)
DrawingType=641 ! Plot Plans
12, "Equipment Number"
14, "Structural ID"
50, "Dwg View Name"
52, "Dwg View Scale"
DrawingType=643 ! Equipment Arrangement Drawings
6, "Nozzle Number"
50, "Dwg View Name"
52, "Dwg View Scale"
DrawingType=665

Annotating Drawings
SP1, "Piping Line Number"

5, "Instr. Tag Number"
6, "Nozzle Number"
DrawingType=731 ! Instrument Location Plans
SP1, "Piping Line Number"
5, "Instr. Tag Number"
6, "Nozzle Number"
As shown in the sample file, the DrawingType=xxx line (where xxx is the drawing type number
found in Standard Note 2000) begins a button definition for a drawing type. You may define up
to 4 buttons per drawing type by using the label type number from the Label Description Library,
followed by a comma (,), followed by the desired button text in quotes.
 If a drawing type is not defined in the lab_button.dwg file, the following default buttons (the
SPx buttons listed in the lab_button.dwg file above) are used:
 SP1: Component Tag
 SP2: Line Number Label
 SP3: Place Flow Arrow
 SP4: Piping Piecemark
Four buttons will always be present on the form in this area. Defining fewer than 4 buttons per
drawing view will result in the defaults listed above being used for the unspecified buttons.
For example, defining only two buttons for a drawing type will result in the 2 user-specified
buttons, plus the remaining default Place Flow Arrow and Piping Piecemark buttons being
available on the form.
Nozzle Number --- Places a nozzle number label. You will be prompted to identify the nozzle
being labeled.
Piping Line Number --- Places a piping line number label. You will be prompted to identify the
line being labeled.
Equipment Number --- Places an equipment number label. You will be prompted to snap to the
equipment item being labeled.
Instrument Tag Number --- Places an instrument tag number label. You will be prompted to
identify the instrument being labeled.
Category Type Options --- Allows selection of specific label category types for label. Options
include Piping/Equipment, Electrical Raceway, Structural, PLANTGEN, Miscellaneous, Drawing
View, and User Input.
 The types of labels listed in each option depend on settings in the Label Description Library
in the Reference Data Manager module.
 Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide for more information on
Label Description Library and setting up labels. More information on these options can also
be found at Name Label (on page 211).
Specific Labels --- Allows placement of specific label types. Options include Piping Line
Number, Component Tag, Piping Reducer, Piping Piecemark, Flow Arrow, Drawing View Scale,
and Drawing View Name labels.
Define Active Leader Line --- Defines a leader line as the leader line used when theActive
with the label.

Annotating Drawings
Move Label --- Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just
a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the
After setting the toggle to the desired position, place a data point or snap to identify the label to
be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new
location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all
Move Text Only --- Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire text, or move
just a single text element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected,
only the text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle is
Move Entire.
After setting the toggle to the desired position, select and place a data point or snap to identify
the text label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move Entire Label option except
that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain in place. The system puts the
text only in raster drag.

Annotating Drawings
moved.
You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and select Accept on the displayed
leader line.
label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify the element to be deleted.
Edit Text --- This option allows you to edit the part of a label that was entered directly at
placement. You will be prompted to identify the label that you wish to edit.
The Edit Text command will edit user defined text but will not resize the label enclosure if
placed with the User Input label type. If the label is to be edited, the correct steps would be to
delete the label and replace it with the correct text. The new label enclosure will be sized
correctly. The deletion step is not needed if the user defined label does not include a label
enclosure.
Add Coordinate Label --- Select and place a data point or snap to identify the previously
created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify the component
being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The system automatically
creates the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the identified name label and
associates the two labels. Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by
using the Update Labels command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for the name
label are associated for move, modify, and delete operations.
Add Name Label --- Select and place a data point or snap to identify a previously created label
to be used for creating a name label. (Do not identify the component being labeled.) Then,
Accept to place the name label. The system automatically creates the name label and
associates the two labels. Both labels can be updated by using the Update Labels command.
The text for the two labels are associated for move, modify, and delete operations.
1. Select the Place Labels command from the Update Labels palette.
The system activates the Place Label form, and prompts you to select the desired labeling
option.
2. Select the desired type of label, then select any additional options you wish to use to modify
the label being placed. For example, you may select the sequence of coordinate display for
coordinate labels; you can also adjust the text size, justification, and termination options for
name and coordinate labels. After selecting the desired label and its settings, Accept the
selections.
You will be prompted to identify the coordinate location or element which you wish to label.
3. Identify the coordinate location or element which you wish to label.

Annotating Drawings
For labels which allow line terminators, you will be prompted to specify all remaining vertices
for the line terminator. When all terminator vertices have been specified, you will be
prompted to accept the leader line or reset the form.
4. Specify all remaining vertices for the line terminator, then Accept the selections.
The system places the label, and prompts you to select another label to be placed.
Equipment Centerlines
This command activates the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form, which lets you place
or revise centerline labels for equipment items in orthogonal views. This command is limited to
the labeling of parametrics only; equipment objects defined as primitives will not be labeled.
Parametrics with primitives added to them will be labeled by this command.

Centerlines will only be placed in orthogonal views. They will be placed for equipment which has
been rotated about one axis (or not rotated at all), but equipment which has been rotated about
two axes will not receive centerline labels.
Centerline labels behave like any other kind of labels; they have associativity with respect to the
equipment group to which they apply. This means that they respect the Update Labels
command in the following situations:
 If the equipment group is moved, the centerline will be moved when the Update Labels
command is next used.
 If the equipment group is deleted, the centerline will be deleted when the Update Labels
command is next used.
The Update Labels command will not be respected for centerline labels in the following
situations:
 If the equipment group has been rotated since the label was placed.
 If the parametric form for equipment group has been modified (after equipment placement).
If either of the above situations occurs after centerline label placement, you will need to delete
and replace the centerlines for the applicable equipment groups.
Before the Equipment Centerlines command can be used, the eqp_center.dwg file must be
edited to control centerline placement according to your specifications.

Annotating Drawings
The eqp_center.dwg file (delivered to the project directory) controls which equipment objects
receive centerline labels. In addition to listing the objects which may be labeled with this
command, this file also specifies the following attributes:
 Which views of the objects will be labeled.
 Multiple centerlines for specified objects.
 Which data points on the equipment object through which the centerline label will be placed.
 The direction of the centerline.
 The length of centerline label's extension beyond the graphical extents of the equipment
object.
 The symbology of the centerline label.
An excerpt from the sample eqp_center.dwg file is listed below.
UNIT= INCH
!Form View CL DP Annotation
!No Type No No Direction Extension Category
!----------------------------------------------------------------------
----
E205 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top
2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3
PS 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! side
PT 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! front
E210 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top
2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3
E215 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top
2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3
Using the first equipment type shown as an example, each field in the file format will be
described.
The presence of the parametric form number of a given equipment type (form number E205 in
this example) specifies that the command will recognize all equipment objects of that type as
recipients of a centerline label.
UNIT= INCH
!Form View CL DP Annotation
!No Type No No Direction Extension Category
!----------------------------------------------------------------------
----
E205 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top
2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3
Each line of the file describes how centerline labels will be placed for one view of that
equipment parametric. To place more than one centerline in that view, simply add another row
of keywords under the same parametric form number as shown in the example above.
The rest of the fields in the file are explained below.
Field Description

Annotating Drawings
UNIT= The units of measure that will apply to the centerline

extension values. The possible values for this field are
INCH for inches, and MM for millimeters.
Form No The equipment parametric form number from which
centerlines are being defined. Each parametric form
number in this file can receive centerline labels. This
field will be empty if this line describes the second (or
more) centerline definition for that equipment parametric
form number.
View Type The type of object view (top, side and end view) for
which centerlines are being defined. The keywords
Primary (P), Secondary (S), and Tertiary (T) describe
the axis of the equipment placement orientation tee. For
example, PS is the plane that includes the primary and
secondary axis of the equipment group. This field will
be empty if this line describes the second or third
centerline for a given equiupment form in a given
drawing view.
CL No The number of the centerline being specified by this row
of the file. The first (or only) centerline for the given view
of this parametric form number is number 1, and the
second centerline for that drawing view is specified by
the number 2.
DP No The datum point through which the centerline will be
placed. For example, DP1 will be the datum point 1 of
equipment.
Direction Direction of centerline. The possible values for this field
are:
PNSPlant north-south
PEWPlant east-west
SNSSite north-south
SEWSite east-west
EPTEquipment primary tee
ESTEquipment secondary tee
ETTEquipment tertiary tee
HORHorizontal
VERTVertical
NORMAL-CLNormal to previously defined centerline
number i in the same view type, where 'normal' is the
plane of the view type being defined. A dash (-) is
required between the NORMAL and CLi keywords.
DPi-DPParallel to a vector from DPi to DPj, where the
DP values correspond to data points on equipment
items.

Annotating Drawings
Extension The default length that the centerline should extend

beyond the graphic range of the equipment being
labeled.
Annotation The user-defined drawing annotation category number
category that applies to the centerline graphic symbology. The
User-Defined Drawing Annotation Category Data option
in the Project Data Manager command of the Project
Administrator (PD_Project) module of PDS controls
graphic symbology. The number placed in this field
should correspond with the listed position of the
category assigned to centerline graphics. For example,
the centerline graphic category in the project from which
the sample file was taken is the third category in the list
of user-defined drawing annotation categories, which
means that it is number 3.
Any text preceded by an exclamation point (!) will not be processed by the system; this
allows users to place comments inside the file.
Place Centerlines by View --- Prompts you to select the view to be processed by the command.
Select the view, then select Accept to place centerlines for that view.
Place Centerlines by Group --- Activates an Equipment Number field, which allows you to
specify the number of the equipment upon which you wish to place centerlines.
Key in the desired equipment number or snap to the desired equipment, then select Accept to
place centerlines for the specified equipment in all drawing views.
Extend Centerline --- Allows you to extend the centerlines that have been placed. After selecting
this command, place a data point on the centerline that you wish to extend. Move the end of the
centerline label to the desired location, then place a second data point to accept the new
centerline extension.
Delete Centerline --- Allows deletion of the existing centerlines. After selecting this command,
snap to the equipment containing the centerline which you wish to delete. Select Accept (or
place a data point) to delete the selected centerline.
Delete Element --- Allows deletion of existing label elements. After selecting this command,
place a data point on the label element which you wish to delete, then place a second data point
to accept deletion of that element.
1. Select the Equipment Centerlines command from the Annotation palette.
The system activates the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form and prompts you to
select the drawing view for which you wish to place centerline labels. (The default action for
the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form is Place Centerlines by View.)
2. Select the view for which you wish to place centerline labels. Select Accept to place
centerlines on all equipment groups allowed in the view.
OR
Specify the desired equipment group by using the Place Centerline by Group option, then
select Accept to place centerlines on the specified equipment group.
3. Use the remaining commands to modify or delete existing centerline labels as necessary.

Annotating Drawings
Update Labels
This command activates the Update Labels form used to update displayable attribute drawing
labels and coordinate labels to reflect changes in the model. Labels can be updated by selected
view or by identifying a specific label in the view. This option is also used to reposition, modify,
delete, and partially edit or completely replace user-defined labels.
This command does not delete associative name labels or coordinate labels when both of the
following conditions have been met:
 The range of the component in the model continues to intersect the volume of the
corresponding drawing view.
 The range of the name or coordinate label (including the text and the leader line) continues
to intersect the space within the drawing that is enclosed by the corresponding drawing
view's skeleton.
The Update Labels command updates name labels on the basis of the Reference Database
under any of the following conditions:
 When changes to the applicable alphanumeric data in the model have been made.
 When changes to the definition of the format for that name label type in the Label
Description Library have been made.
 When the label attributes listed in the Label Graphic Data form of the Label Description
Library are modified. Such items include line weight, line style, color, character size, and
several other label attributes.
 When the definition of the label enclosure for that name label type was revised in the Label
Description Library.
 When the selection of underlining for the text within that name label type has been revised in
the Label Description Library. For instance, if the name label was created at a time when the
Label Description Library specified no underlining for the label's text, but the definition has
been changed, the name label is updated. If the text for the name label was created with
underlining and the Label Description Library has been revised, the name label is updated.
In all cases when the underlining option has been enabled, the length of the underlining will
be corrected when the length of text within the applicable name label is updated.
 When one of the labeled attributes (such as a coordinate) has been changed.
Equipment must be defined with a datum point for labels to update on primitive graphics.

Annotating Drawings
The Update Labels command also updates equipment centerlines placed with the Equipment
Centerlines command. It will update the centerline position if an equipment group has been
moved or deleted. It will not update the centerlines for a group that has been rotated, or if a
modification has been made to the corresponding parametric form. In either of these cases, the
centerline should be deleted and replaced after the modification.
Selecting the Restart command near the top of the form will highlight all available views.
Otherwise, you may select the desired view(s) from list on the form, or you will be prompted to
identify them in the drawing.
Create Revision Labels/Do NOT Create Revision Labels --- Controls the creation of revision
labels. If this option is activated, the system will maintain a copy of any name or coordinate label
that is updated or deleted. These revision labels can be displayed inside revision clouds or
revision triangles on orthographic drawings.
When this option is enabled, a copy of the previous version of the name or coordinate label is
made in the following instances:
The text for a name or coordinate label is updated in the drawing on the basis of changes in the
database or movement of the labelled component.
A name or coordinate label is deleted in the drawing because the labelled component has been
deleted from the model.
The label format has been changed during the project life cycle.
Update Labels cannot distinguish between a label being moved as a result of a
component being moved in the model and a label being moved because a drawing view was
repositioned for the sake of drawing composition. Therefore, if you select this option after
moving a drawing view, all name and coordinate labels will be copied as updated labels.
The revision labels will be identical to the drawing labels except that:
The weight for a revision management label will be two (2) greater than the weight of the
corresponding drawing label.
The color of a revision management label will be zero (typically white).
They will be assigned to the same drawing category as defined for the "hidden"
vector-hidden-line graphics for that drawing view. This will allow creation and deletion of these
labels to be managed according to drawing view.
Only the label's text will be copied as a revision management label; the leader line and any
enclosures will not.

Annotating Drawings
Since a drawing can have no more than 64 drawing categories, it is necessary to share
the category for the optional "hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics. Because of this, users should
coordinate creation and deletion of hidden graphics with the use of revision management labels.
Axis Lock Off/On --- When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for placement of labels
in a drawing. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other
words, one segment can be locked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing,
whereas another segment may not be locked to a drawing axis.
Update Selected Views --- Updates all the labels in the specified view.
Update Single Labels --- Updates the specified drawing label(s) to reflect the current status of
the model.
Move Entire Label --- Repositions the drawing label(s) in the drawing view, but does not update
the text. Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or to move just a
single element of a label which has multiple text elements.
If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For
example, if a label consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move
the name label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The default setting for
this toggle is Move Entire.
Move Text Only --- Repositions the drawing label text in the drawing view. Set the Move
Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a single element of a label
which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by
the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire.

Annotating Drawings
moved.
line.
Delete Element --- Deletes entire or selected elements of name or coordinate labels. This
option activates a Delete Entire / Delete Partial toggle. Set the toggle to entire or partial, select
the label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify the element to be deleted.
Delete Revision Labels --- Deletes revision management labels from all or selected drawing
views. Place a data point on the drawing view containing revision management labels to be
deleted. The selected drawing view will be highlighted. To select all drawing views, place a data
point on each one. When the form is accepted, the revision management labels for the selected
drawing view(s) will be deleted.
Although revision management labels share the drawing category with "hidden"
vector-hidden-line graphics, deleting revision management labels will not affect the "hidden"
vector-hidden-line graphics. However, re-creating vector hidden-line graphics will delete all
graphics on that level, including revision management labels, for the active view.
Revise Text (on page 231) --- Select to completely replace user-defined label text.
Edit Text (on page 219) --- Select to partially edit that part of the user-defined text in the label.

Accept/Select Update Select the desired option from the
Labels option bottom of the form. The move options
are used to reposition the drawing
label(s) in the drawing view, but do not
update the text.
Snap lock mode is automatically
activated with this command and the
previous snap lock mode is restored
when exiting this command by any
means. This option provides the
features of the Move Entire Label option
and the MicroStation Modify Element
command.
Identify Label (Data Btn Place a data point on (or snap to) the
or Snap) desired label.
Identify Element or Place a data point on the element of the
Accept for Last Label label to be deleted.

Annotating Drawings

Annotating Drawings

SECTION 14
Plot Manager
This command provides a PDS-specific plotting interface for drawings external to the graphics
environment. It is used to control reference model display, category display within the reference
models, and category display within the drawing independently of the default or active settings in
the drawing being plotted. The drawplotsize file in the project directory contains the default
Drawing Plot Size Table.
Plot Manager provides the following options:
 Display levels for all reference models associated with a specified drawing can be set On or
Off.
 Display levels for all reference models associated with a specified drawing view can be set
On or Off.
 Individual reference model display levels associated with a specific drawing view can be set
On or Off.
To plot a drawing using Plot Manager, you must first have a plot queue. Plot queues are created
automatically when the software is installed.
Plot Manager automatically displays the date and time for the following events:
 The most recent activation of the hidden-line graphics process. The date and time will be
preceded by the text VHL:. The data and time will be added to the drawing.
 The plotting process. The date and time will be preceded by the text Plotted:. Although the
date and time will be plotted on the hard copy of the drawing, the text will not be added to
the actual drawing file.
Through Project Data Manager, you can define the size, font, color, and weight of the text that
displays this information. This text will be displayed on the unique "VHL/Plot Date/Time" drawing
category. If the symbology options for this feature are not defined, the following defaults will be
used:
 Text Size - uses drawing's active character size
 Text Font - uses text font for coordinate labels
 Color - set to zero (0)
 Weight - set to zero (0)
See Also
Plot Drawing (on page 282)

Plot Manager
Plot Drawing
The Plot Manager automatically determines the plot size using the Drawing Plot Size Table in
the project directory on the basis of the drawing size. This command specifies the drawing type
and drawing to be plotted. There is also an option for including or removing reference models.
Four optional queues, besides the default queue, can be created and defined.
1. Select Plot Manager from the Drawing Management form.
The system displays the Plot Manager form with a Drawing Type display list.

Select the drawing type of drawing(s) you wish to plot, and select Accept to accept.
The system displays a Drawings display list.
3. Select Drawing.
Select all of the drawings to be plotted, and select Accept.
The system activates a form with I/Plot parameter file options and process and queue
options. The system will automatically load the plot queue, plot size, levels, and design file
name in the I/Plot parameter file you select.
Refer to the Queue Setup section for information on creating and defining queues.
4. Accept to Submit or Select Option.
Select Accept if submitting immediately with the default parameters file to the default
queue.
OR
Select an I/Plot Parameters file to be included with your drawing. If no parameters file is
selected, the system will use the default file.
Select a plot queue. If no queue is selected, the system will use the Default queue.
Specify the number of copies to be plotted; the default value for this field is 1.
Select a scale factor, if desired. The default size is 1.0 (full size); you may enter any positive
number less than 1.0 if you would like to plot a smaller drawing for checking purposes.

Plot Manager
Set the No Rotation / Rotate 90 Degrees toggle to the desired position.

Set the Default Categories and Reference Models / Select Categories and Reference
Models toggle to the appropriate position.
The default position tells the system to use the categories specified for that drawing
type in the Project Setup form. If no default categories exist for that drawing type, the
actively displayed categories will be plotted.
This command's default toggle setting is different from the default setting of the
Plot command in the graphics environment.
5. Toggle from Submit Immediately to Submission is Delayed to specify the time to submit
the plotted drawing.
THEN
6. Select Accept to submit with the chosen options.
If Default Categories and Reference Models is selected, the system processes the drawings,
and sends the data to the plot queue for plotting.
If Select Categories and Reference Models is selected, the system processes the drawing
information and displays a list of drawing views associated with the specified drawing. The
options used to specify the categories to be turned on or off are displayed.
7. Select Option or Select Drawing View.

Select the Drawing Categories option to review the list of drawing categories that are
currently displayed in the view and to specify the categories to be turned on or off. Refer to
the Drawing Categories (on page 284) section for more information.
OR
Select the drawing view and the Reference Models option to review and specify the
categories to be turned on or off for individual reference models associated with the specific
drawing view being plotted. Refer to the Reference Models (on page 285) section for more
information.
OR

Plot Manager
Select All Reference Models Display OFF to specify that the categories displayed for all
reference models associated with the selected drawing be turned off for the drawing plot.
OR
Select All Reference Models Display ON to specify that the categories displayed for all
reference models associated with the selected drawing be turned on for the drawing plot.
8. Select Accept to accept the specified plot processing information.
The system processes the information and submits the plotted drawing to the plot queue at
the time previously specified.
9. Select Cancel to exit the form. To exit the form without submitting the plots, select the Shell
or Top buttons.
The actual drawing size is set by the plot queue in relation to the plot size.
Drawing Categories
This option activates the Drawing Categories form. It is used to specify the categories to be
turned on or off for the drawing plot. The categories that are turned on are highlighted. When
you select a highlighted category, the highlight is removed to indicate that the category is turned
off.
to...
Select Select the categories to turn off or on for the drawing to be
Category plotted, and select Accept to accept the selected
categories.

Plot Manager
Reference Models
This option activates the Reference Models form. It is used to select reference models and
review and specify the individual reference model categories to be turned on or off for the
specific drawing view being plotted.
The drawing view must be selected from the top of the Plot Manager form.
All Reference Models Display OFF --- Specifies that the categories displayed for all of the
reference models associated with the drawing view be turned off for the drawing plot.
All Reference Models Display ON --- Specifies that the categories displayed for all of the
reference models associated with the drawing view to be turned on for the drawing plot.
Reference Model Categories --- Reviews and specifies the categories to be turned on or off for
a specific reference model.
Disc/Model Name --- Displays the available models available for plotting.
1. Select the Reference Models option from the Plot Manager form.
The system activates the Reference Models form with a list of reference models for the
specified drawing view to be plotted.
2. Select Optionor Select Reference Model.
Select All Reference Models Display OFF to specify that the categories displayed for all of
the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned off for the drawing plot.
OR
Select All Reference Models Display ON to specify that the categories displayed for all of
the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned on for the drawing plot.
OR
Select the desired reference model from the list of models at the top of the form, and select
the Reference Model Categories option to review and specify the categories to be turned
on or off for a specific reference model.

Plot Manager
The system activates the Review Model Categories form.
The categories that are turned on are highlighted. When you select a highlighted category,
the highlight is removed to indicate that the category is turned off.
3. Select Category.
Select the categories that you wish to turn off or on for the drawing to be plotted.
4. Select Accept to accept the specified categories to be turned on or off.
The system processes the specified drawing plot information and returns to the Plot
Manager form.

SECTION 15
Project Planner
The Project Planner option activates the interactive graphics environment to allow you to create
unassigned drawing views. After an unassigned view is created, it can be assigned to only one
drawing.
1. Select Project Planner from the Drawing Management form.
2. The first time you select this option, the system prompts
Key plan file does not exist, Accept to Create
3. Select Accept to create the project key plan model.
The system copies the model seed file to the file keyplan.dgn in the project directory.
Key Plan model successfully created,
The system activates the graphics command environment for the project key plan model.
Refer to the description of the graphics environment in Drawing Annotation Symbology (on page
210) for more information on working in graphics.
See Also
Project Planner Command Menu (on page 287)
Project Planner Command Menu

The command menu at the bottom of the screen provides fast access to commonly used
MicroStation and PDS commands. The following commands are available on the Project
Planner Command Menu.
PlotPlan (on page 288) --- The Plot Plan commands create unassigned drawing views, and
allow specification of viewing options.
View (on page 302) --- This pull-down provides view manipulations. All of these commands
result in modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the view of
the model but do not manipulate the actual model.
File (on page 302) --- This pull-down provides basic file manipulation commands, such as
compressing and exiting the file. It also includes commands which allow you to plot drawings or
select another drawing.
Element Commands (on page 147) --- This pull-down provides the Analyze command used to
open the Element Information settings box.
Settings Command (on page 147) --- This pull-down provides the ability to modify rendering,
fonts and colors used during a graphics session.
User Commands (on page 147) --- This pull-down allows you to modify things that apply only to
your system such as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how
various items on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default,
and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.

Project Planner
PlotPlan
Drawing Views (on page 11) --- Activates the form used to create
unassigned drawing views.
Viewing Options (on page 293) --- Activates a form consisting of

viewing options.
Exit (on page 302) --- Exits Project Planner, and returns you to
the Drawing Management menu.
Drawing Views
This command activates the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form. It is used to create a
drawing view. You can specify the drawing view by using a saved view definition created for a
screen view in the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume
coordinates to be used, or defining a volume about a specified named item. This command also
specifies the active category data for the drawing view.
Standard View Buttons --- Define the orientation of the drawing view. These buttons include:
Plan, Looking East, Looking North, Isometric, Looking West, Looking South, and Plan (Vertical).
Delete Unassigned Views --- Deletes an existing unassigned view.
Update Views --- Updates the screen display for the unassigned drawing views.
Select Model --- Identifies the model file for the unassigned drawing view to be created.
Named Item --- Uses the coordinates and clipping volume of a named item to define them for
the drawing view.
Saved View --- Uses coordinates and clipping volume of the saved view to define them for the
drawing view.
Graphic Symbology --- Defines the graphic symbology for the Key Plan model.

Project Planner
View Number --- Key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters) for the
unassigned drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the number is unique within the
project.
View Name --- Key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters) associated
with the specified drawing view.
View Scale --- The system displays a scale display list. Select a new scale value for the view to
be created.
Model Number --- Key in the model number to identify the model for the unassigned drawing
view or select the Select Model (on page 290) option from the bottom of the form to select the
model from a series of forms.
Drawing View Volume fields --- The Low and High columns and the Easting, Northing, and
Elevation fields display the volume for the drawing view.
1. Select the Drawing Views command from the panel menu.
The system activates the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form.
2. Specify the required view information for the drawing view being created.
3. Select one of the seven view orientation options from the center of the form.
4. Select the Drawing View Volume fields and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and
Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X' X". (You can use a
negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Then, key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second
OR
Select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the orientation and
clipping volume of the drawing view. Key in the name of the saved view for the model
specified in the Model Number field.
OR
Select the Named Item option to use a pre-defined named item to define the clipping
volume for the drawing view. (See the section describing the Named Item (on page 290)
option.)
5. Accept or Select Other Options.
Accept the displayed coordinate values.
Creating Drawing View
See Also
Delete Unassigned View (on page 291)
Update Views (on page 292)
Graphic Symbology (on page 292)

Project Planner
Select Model
This option identifies the model file for the unassigned drawing view to be created.
The system displays the disciplines for the active project.
1. Select Discipline or Exit.
Select the discipline for the model file and select Accept.
The system displays the Design Area display list for the selected discipline.
2. Select Area or Exit.
Select the design area for the model file and select Accept.
3. Select Model.
Select the model file and select Accept.
Named Item
This option activates the Create View Of Named Item form. It uses pre-defined named item to
specify the data coordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.
The view number and name of the unassigned drawing view to be created must be specified in
the Create Unassigned Drawing View form.
The appropriate name attribute must have been defined for the item.
1. Select the Named Item option from the Create Unassigned Drawing View form.
The system activates the Create View Of Named Item form.
2. Specify Tag Number.
Select and key in the appropriate item number to specify either the Piping Component
Number, Engineered Item Number, Instrument Tag Number, Equipment Number, or Nozzle
Number of the specified item.
For an equipment nozzle, the system also prompts for the equipment group number.
The system displays the Delta Coordinates associated with the named item.
These coordinates define the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits the
named item. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping
volume.

Project Planner
3. Accept the displayed values.

The system returns to the Create Drawing View form and updates the coordinate values.
Delete Unassigned View

This option activates the Delete Unassigned View form. It is used to delete an existing
unassigned drawing view.
Orientation: --- Displays all of the possible orientations for a drawing view.
Number/Name --- Displays all of the unassigned drawing views for a selected orientation.
1. Select the Delete Unassigned View option from the Create Unassigned Drawing Views
form.
The system displays the Delete Unassigned Views form.
2. Select Orientation.
Select the view orientation for the unassigned drawing view to be deleted.
The system displays the unassigned drawing views for the selected orientation.
OR
No Unassigned Drawing View Defined If there are no views for the selected orientation.
3. Select Unassigned Views.
Select the unassigned drawing views to be deleted and select Accept.
The system deletes the selected view and updates the form.

Project Planner
Update Views
This option updates the screen display for the unassigned drawing views.
Graphic Symbology
This option activates the Project Key Plan Graphic Symbology form.It is used to define the
graphic symbology (level, color, line weight, and line style) for the Key Plan model.
1. Select the Graphic Symbology option from the Create Unassigned Drawing View form.
The system activates the Project Key Plan Graphic Symbology form.
2. Select the field for the symbology value to be revised.
3. Level
Place a data point along the slider to set the MicroStation display level.
Color
The system activates the Select Color form which displays the active color settings for the
project. Select the color from the form and select Accept.
Weight
Place a data point along the slider to set the weight.

4. Select Symbology.
Select the desired symbology option.

5. Accept the specified symbology changes.

Project Planner
Viewing Options
This command provides access to a set of options that allow you to manipulate the model views
for each screen or window.
P&ID Drawing View

The following view commands perform special processing when you select the active P&ID
drawing view or PD_Design view.
 Fit View automatically sets the window area to the extent of the P&ID drawing border.
 Copy View disables copying the active P&ID drawing view to another model view. However,
you can copy another model view to the active P&ID drawing view. This causes the P&ID
drawing view to be saved as a named model view, PIDVUE, which can be recalled at a later
time.
The View Rotation commands preserve the view definition in a saved model view, PIDVUE,
when you select the active P&ID drawing view to be rotated. The selected View Rotation
command will then restore that view to the saved model view, MDLVUE, and then rotate that
named model view about its origin.

Project Planner
Set View Orientation

The Plan View, Iso View, Looking North, Looking South, Looking East, and Looking West
commands allow you to set the view orientation to one of the standard viewing directions. You
can specify more than one screen with the same view.
The default screen orientations are:
Plan View --- Orients a screen to the plan view orientation.

Isometric View --- Orients a screen to the isometric viewing direction.
Looking North --- Orients a screen view looking north.
Looking South --- Orients a screen view looking south.
Looking East --- Orients a screen view looking east.
Looking West --- Orients a screen view looking west.

Project Planner
Update Window
The Update View commands updates the screen display for a virtual screen or a specified view.
Update Both – Updates both (left and right) virtual screens.

Update View – Updates the selected window view. The system prompts you to select the view
to update.
Update Left – Updates the left virtual screen.
Update Right – Updates the right virtual screen.
Rotate About View

The Rotate About View commands allow you to rotate a view about the selected axis (X, Y or Z).
The angle follows the Right Hand Rule with the thumb pointing toward the positive axis.
Rotate About X Axis --- Rotates the horizontal axis of a screen view counter-clockwise.
Rotate About Y Axis --- Rotates the vertical axis of a screen view counter-clockwise.
Rotate About Z Axis --- Rotates the X and Y axes of a screen view counter-clockwise.

Project Planner
Match Planar Element

The Match Planar Element command allows you to establish a view normal to a planar element.
Rotation 3 Points
The Rotation 3 Points command allows you to rotate the view orientation so that you are looking
normal to the X and Y planes defined by the three points. The first two data points define the X
axis. The line between the first and third data points define the Y axis.

Enter first point @x axis Place a data point to define the origin of the X
origin axis.
Enter second point on x Place a data point to define the positive direction
axis of the X axis.
Enter point to define y Place the third data point to define the Y axis.
axis The viewing plane will be parallel to the plane
defined by the three data points.

Project Planner
Dialog View Rotation

This command activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box.
Color Shading
The Permanent Color Shading and Color Shading options are used to render the contents of a
screen view. When you select either of the color shading options the system displays a list of
render options.
Select the option for the type of rendering to be performed and select the screen view to be
processed.
 For Permanent Color Shading, select a view number from the form (1-8). The selected
view will display with the specified render option until you change it.
 For Color Shading, place a data point in the screen view to be updated. The rendered view
will revert to wireframe display when it is updated.

Project Planner
Wiremesh
This option renders the contents of a view(s) as a wiremesh display. Wiremesh display is similar
to the default wireframe display in that all elements are transparent and do not obscure other
elements. In a wiremesh display, however, curved surfaces are represented by a polygonal
mesh rather than a simple wireframe. This representation can increase the realism of curved
surfaces, although it may also increase the amount of clutter as more lines are displayed for
surfaces that would normally be hidden.
Cross-Section
This option renders the contents of a view as a cross-section. If an auxiliary coordinate system
(ACS) is active, the cross-section is cut at the X-Y plane of the ACS. Otherwise it is cut at the
views active depth (parallel to the view).
Hidden Line
This option renders the contents of a view as a polygon display. In a polygon display, only parts
of elements that would actually be visible are displayed. Lines hidden behind objects are
removed to create a more realistic representation. MicroStation accomplishes this by
decomposing each element into polygons. Hidden line removal processing is much slower than
wireframe and wiremesh display, and the processing time is roughly equivalent to the other,
more realistic type of rendering.
Filled Hidden Line

This option renders the contents of a view as a filled polygon display. A filled polygon display is
identical to a polygon display except that the polygons are filled with element color. This creates
an interesting cartoon-like effect that may be useful in some circumstances, particularly if the
hardware can display only a limited number of colors.
Constant Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a constant shaded model. In a constant shaded
model, each element is displayed as one or more polygons filled with a single (constant) color.
The color is computed once for each polygon from the element color, material characteristics,
and lighting configuration (see 3D concepts in the user's guide). Curved surfaces are
decomposed into a mesh of polygons. Each polygon is shaded with a single color and surfaces
appear tiled.
Smooth Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a smooth (Gouraud) shaded model. In smooth
shaded models, the appearance of curved surfaces is more realistic than in constant shaded
models because polygon color is computed at polygon boundaries and color is blended across
polygon interiors. This gives surfaces a smooth appearance.
Phong Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a Phong shaded model. This is the most realistic
type of rendering supported by MicroStation.
In a Phong shaded model, the color of each pixel is recomputed. Phong shading is useful for
producing high-quality images when speed is not critical and very exact lighting effects are
desired. If light sources are close to the objects being rendered, such as a spotlight shining on a
home, Phong shading may be the only way to see the exact location of the light beam.

Project Planner
Large numbers of computations slow display time considerably. In most instances, Phong
shaded models are very similar to smooth shaded models and do not justify the increased
processing time.
Stereo
This option renders the contents of a view as a 3D image. It creates a stereo pair of images and
merges the two images into a single image, which you can view by wearing red/blue glasses.
Put on the red/blue glasses making sure that the red lens is over the left eye and the blue lens is
over the right eye. View the image with your eyes level and square to the screen.
Camera View
This option activates five options used to define the target, position, and clipping planes for a
view camera.
Camera Setup
This option lets you set the target, position, and clipping planes for a view camera and turn on
the camera for the view. The camera lens is set with the Camera Lens option.
To define the camera target use a data point. The point becomes the focal point (center) of the
view. Objects beyond the target point will appear smaller due to the nature of the perspective
projection. Objects in front of the target point will appear larger and may be excluded from the
viewing pyramid.
Place a data point to define the camera position. A dynamic pyramid displays to show the
viewing volume with the camera at the pointer location.
Place a data point to define the front clipping plane (display depth). Any elements or portions of
elements in front of this plane are not displayed.
Place a final data point to define the back clipping plane (display depth). Any elements or
portions of elements beyond this plane are not displayed, but the view is turned on.
Camera Target
This option lets you set the target of a view camera without changing the camera position. This
is like standing in one position and moving the camera to view different targets.

Project Planner
Camera Position
This option lets you set the position of a view camera without changing the camera target. This
is like focusing the camera at an object and moving around to obtain different views of the
object.
Camera Lens
This option activates the camera lens settings display list. This list lets you set the angles and
focal lengths of view camera lenses.
The camera lens settings displayed are for the view chosen from the view number option.
Angle/Focal Length
The lens angle for the camera of the chosen view can be specified in degrees or as the lens
focal length in millimeters (mm). You can also specify the lens by choosing a standard lens from
the Standard option menu. The angles and focal lengths of the standard lenses are:
Standard Lens Angle Focal Length (mm)
Fisheye 93.3 20
Extra Wide 74.3 28
Wide 62.4 35
Normal 46.0 50
Portrait 28.0 85
Telephoto 12.1 200
Telescopic 2.4 1000
Camera Off
This option turns the camera view off.
Views
The Views commands allow you to manipulate views between two specified windows.
Copy View --- copies a selected view display from one window to another.
Swap View --- option allows you to change from either the right or left screen display.

Project Planner
View On --- option activates eight view options which correspond to the window views (1-4) on
the right screen and window views (5-8) on the left screen.
View Off --- option allows you to select and place a data point in the window views to turn
specified views off.
Level Symbology On
This command provides the option to enable the display of reference models with the active
Level Symbology Off

This command provides the option to disable the display of reference models with the active

Project Planner
Form Left/Right Screen

The Form Left Screen / Form Right Screen toggle sets forms to be automatically displayed on
the right (front) screen or the left (back) screen. This option is only relevant for dual-screen
configurations.
Exit
View
The Viewing commands on this palette are the same commands as the ones appearing on the
Viewing command palette for Composition/Annotation, with the exception of Viewing Options.
The Viewing Options palette contains the same commands as described in PlotPlan (on page
288).
File
File Design (on page 303) --- Saves the active parameters defined
in the current design session.
Exit (on page 303) --- Exits the design file.

Project Planner
File Design
The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the current
design session. This command saves:
 MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes.
 PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location of
the Piping Designer base form.
Exit

Project Planner

SECTION 16
Project Setup
This option activates the Project Setup form. It provides various options to define defaults for all
drawings created in a project. It also provides fields that allow you to set up drawing directories,
network address name, drawing scale, and drawing size for each drawing type. These fields,
displayed on the right side of the form, can be used independently of the options at the top of
the form. If only these fields are defined, all reference categories and drawing types are
available when you create a drawing. There can only be one default directory for each drawing
type.
There are also fields available for entering the cell library name, directory, and network address
of the cell library to be used for annotation in the drawings. Each drawing type may use either
the project cell library or an alternate cell library.
Once any of the options are used, the system displays only the defined reference
categories (disciplines) and model data display categories for the drawings of that drawing type.
Reference models that are attached to drawings not in the defined reference categories will not
be available for selection as reference models.
Drawing Type (on page 307) --- Displays the project drawing types.
Reference Categories (on page 308) --- Defines a default list of reference-model data categories
that determines which levels in an attached model are on and off for a drawing type. It also
filters models with the definitions specified using the Automatic Attach & Verify option.
Copy Drawing Type (on page 310) --- Copies an existing project setup.
Remove Reference (on page 311) --- Removes all reference model data categories in a given
drawing type which were previously defined using the Reference Categories option for the
project.
Plotting Categories (on page 312) --- Specifies which levels in a drawing are to be plotted for a
specific drawing type. You can remove data categories from the plotting list by placing a data
point on the appropriate category names.

Project Setup
Label Filter (on page 313) --- Specifies which labels will be available for annotation of a specific
drawing type. You can remove labels from the display list by placing a data point on the
appropriate label names.
All Project Setup options have the following fields on their forms:
Drawing Directory --- Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file.
Network Address --- Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawing file.
Drawing Scale --- Select a value from the display list of plotted scales for the drawing. This sets
the default scale factor. You can change the scale when you create/revise each drawing. The
scale factors are in the Standard Note Library. The scale of the drawing view can be modified at
time of creation.
English Units - m' m" = n' n" --- Where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the
model. For example, 1/4"=1' indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the
model.
Metric Units - n:nn --- Where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model.
For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model.
Drawing Size --- Select either A, B, C, D, E, or F from the display list of border sizes.
Refer to the section on Drawing Plot Size (on page 13) for information on the drawing border
reference files for the various sizes and drawing types.
English
A 8 1/2 X 11
B 11 X 17
C 17 X 22
D 24 X 36
E 34 X 44
F 28 X 40
Metric
A0 840mm X 1189mm
A1 595mm X 840mm
A2 420mm X 595mm
A3 297mm X 420mm
A4 210mm X 297mm
Cell Library Name --- Key in the name of an alternate cell library to be used for this drawing
type. If nothing is entered here, the project cell library will be chosen by default.
Cell Directory --- Specifies the directory in which the cell library resides.
Cell Network Address --- Specifies the network address of the machine on which the cell
library resides.
Project Seed File/Alternate Seed File --- Specifies whether the project seed drawing or an
alternate seed drawing is to be used in creating drawings. The alternate seed drawings, named
draw_seed.<drawing_type>, will be created in the project directory.
1. Select the Project Setup command from the Drawing Management form.

Project Setup
The system displays the Project Setup form with a Drawing Type display list.
2. Select the Drawing Type option from the Project Setup form.
The system activates a scrolling list of drawing types, and expects a specific type to be
selected before further action can be taken. When a drawing type is selected, the system
activates a form that allows you to key in the defaults of the selected drawing type.
If there is a drawing category, whose default values you would like to copy, select the Copy
Drawing Type option. This option will display a scrolling list of drawing types. When a
drawing type is selected from this list and the form is confirmed, the system will copy the
default location, scale, size, and cell information of that drawing type into the fields of the
previously-selected drawing type.
3. Select the Reference Categories or Remove Reference option.
The system activates a form which allows you to modify a list of reference categories to
remove or include when creating a drawing in the project.
4. Select the Plotting Categories option.
The system activates a form which allows you to pick plotting categories to remove or
include when creating a drawing in the project.
5. Select the Label Filter option.
The system activates a form which allows you to pick annotation labels that will be
displayed on the label placement forms in the graphics environment.
6. Select the Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File toggle setting that is appropriate for this
drawing type.
Drawing Type
This option activates the Drawing Type field. It is used to define the default settings for each
drawing in a new project.
1. Select the Project Setup option from the Drawing Management form.
The system displays the Project Setup form and the Drawing Type display list.
2. Specify Drawing Type.
Select a drawing type from the list. You can have one default directory for each available
drawing type in your project.

Project Setup
3. Specify the default drawing file pathname/network address.

4. Select the Reference Categories option to add reference categories to define which
disciplines will be displayed in the drawings of the specified drawing type. See Reference
Categories (on page 308) for more information.
5. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference categories so that the models
within the specified disciplines will not be displayed in the drawings created in this directory.
6. Accept or Reject.
Accept the Project Setup and return to the Drawing Management form.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Drawing Management form.
Reference Categories
This option activates a Reference Categories display list. It is used to determine the default
disciplines that are available to be attached to a view when reference files are attached.
It is also used to select the default reference categories and model data display categories for a
specified drawing type. These categories can be toggled to on or off by highlighting or
de-highlighting them.
Like all of the other options on the Project Setup form, this option first displays a list of
reference categories. It then allows you to selectively set the default model data display
categories.
If a discipline is not selected, it will not appear in the list of disciplines available for
attachment.
1. Select the Reference Categories option to define reference models for the default drawing
setup.
The system activates the Reference Categories display list.
2. Select a category and select Accept.
The system displays a list of available reference model data display categories, and
indicates whether listed categories are turned On or Off during the drawing view creation
and during VHL processing.

Project Setup
3. You may control all categories for drawing view creation and VHL by using the Turn on All
Create Categories and the Turn on All VHL Categories options.
You may also toggle selected categories Off or On for drawing view creation and/or VHL
processing by placing a data point on the current setting. When the categories are turned
off, they are no longer highlighted.
Turning a category On for creation means that whenever a drawing view is created, the
specified category will be displayed in the drawing view.
Turning a category On for VHL means that the specified category will be processed for VHL.
Turning a category Off for VHL means that the specified category will be ignored by VHL.
4. You may also override the default symbology for the active discipline by using the Define
Reference Symbology command. This will allow each discipline's reference file symbology
to be set for display, VHL (and, therefore, plotting). When the default symbology is used, the
toggles on this form are all set to Disabled.
Toggling Color to the Enabled setting activates the Reference Model Symbology Color
form. This form allows you to select which color you would like to use to represent the active
discipline. These settings are used for the categories set to On for VHL.
Toggling Style to the Enabled setting displays the available line styles. This allows you to
select which line style you would like to use to represent the active discipline.

Project Setup
Toggling Weight to the Enabled setting displays the available line weights. This allows you
to select which line weight you would like to use to represent the active discipline.
5. Set the symbology options to obtain the desired effects.
THEN
Select Accept to return to the Project Setup form.
OR
Select Cancel to return to the Project Setup form and discard all changes.
The user-defined reference symbology settings for VHL in this form apply only to the
visible edges from the VHL output. Refer to the "Hidden Line Data" section in the Project
Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information about setting user-defined
symbology for the hidden lines (as opposed to the visible edges).
Copy Drawing Type

This option activates the Copy Drawing Type field. It is used to copy previously defined
defaults for the drawings in a specified drawing type directory for use in drawings in another
drawing type. The default reference categories and model data display categories can then be
modified.
1. Select the Project Setup option from the Drawing Management form.
The system displays the Project Setup form and a Drawing Type list with a list of the
drawing types that have been defined.
2. Select the Copy Drawing Type option.
The system displays a Drawing Type display list with the drawing types that have previously
defined project setups.
3. Specify Drawing Type.
Select the drawing type of the project setup to be copied.
The system automatically displays the information for that project setup.
4. Select the Drawing Type option.
5. Select the new drawing type for the copied project setup.
6. Key in any modification to the location and size fields.

Project Setup
7. Select the Reference Categories option to modify reference categories and model data
display categories for the drawing type in the specified directory.
8. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference categories from the drawing type
in the specified directory.
9. Accept the Project Setup and return to the Drawing Management form.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Drawing Management form.
Remove Reference
This option activates a Remove Reference display list. It is used to remove reference categories
for the project setup default for creating a drawing or drawing view in a specified drawing type.
This command removes the default model disciplines defined by the Reference Categories
command or those included in a copied project setup.
1. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference model definitions from the
project setup.
The system displays the Remove Reference display list that contains all of the categories
that are defined for the project.
2. Select Disciplines to Remove and Accept.
Select the categories to remove and select Accept.
OR

Project Setup
Plotting Categories
This option activates a Plotting Categories display list. It is used to specify which levels in an
attached model are to be plotted for a specific drawing type.
1. Select the Plotting Categories option to remove plotting category definitions from the
project setup.
The system displays the Plotting Categories display list that contains all of the categories
that are defined to be plotted for the project.
2. Select Categories to Remove and Accept.
Select the categories to remove and select Accept.
OR

Project Setup
Label Filter
This option activates a Label Filter display list. It is used to specify which types of labels will be
displayed for a specific drawing type.
1. Select the Label Filter option to remove labels from the list.
The system displays the display list that contains all of the labels that are defined to be
displayed for the project.
2. Select Labels to Remove and Accept.
Select the labels to remove and select Accept.
OR

Project Setup

SECTION 17
Plot Setup Manager

This option activates the I/Plot Parameter Files form. It is used to create I/Plot Parameter
records. Specifically, the Plot Manager sets the following I/Plot options automatically on the
basis of available drawing management data:Queue, View, Region, Units, X Size, Y Size, Scale,
Data Rescale, Rotation, Design, and Levels.
To select any other I/Plot options, the I/Plot Parameter records must be pre-defined in the
Project Control Database, and the I/Plot Parameter files must be created using the I/Plot
product.
Create (see "Create I/Plot Parameter File" on page 316) --- Creates I/Plot Parameter records.
This option is activated by default when the form appears.
Revise (see "Revise I/Plot Parameter File" on page 317) --- Revises existing I/Plot Parameter
records.
Delete (see "Delete I/Plot Parameter File" on page 318) --- Deletes existing I/Plot Parameter
records.
I/Plot Number --- Defines the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be created (an
alphanumeric value up to 24 characters long).
Note: Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and a blank space cannot be used to define
the I/Plot number.
I/Plot Description --- Defines the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric value up to
40 characters).
File Specification --- Defines the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14 characters).
Path Name --- Defines directory path (up to 36 characters) specifying the directory to contain
the parameter file.
Workstation/Server Name --- Defines the workstation node address to contain the drawing file
(an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).
1. Select the Plot Setup Manager option from the Drawing Management form.

Plot Setup Manager
The system displays the I/Plot Parameter File form.

2. Select one of the options.
OR
Create I/Plot Parameter File

This command is used to define the name, description, and the full file specification for an I/Plot
Parameter file. You can choose from any of the I/Plot Parameter files created with the Plot
Setup Manager at the time of plotting, otherwise the system will use the default I/Plot
Parameter file.
I/Plot Number --- Defines the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be created (an
alphanumeric value up to 24 characters).
Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and blank spaces cannot be used to define
the I/Plot number.
I/Plot Description --- Defines the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric value up to
40 characters).
File Specification --- Defines the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14 characters).
Path Name --- Defines the directory path specifying the directory to contain the parameter file
(up to 36 characters).
Workstation/Server Name --- Defines the workstation node address to contain the drawing file
1. Specify I/Plot Number.
Key in the I/Plot identification and location information.
2. Select Accept to create the I/Plot Parameter file.
OR

Plot Setup Manager
Revise I/Plot Parameter File

This command activates an I/Plot Parameter File display list. It is used to select a parameter file
to revise. One or all of the fields can be revised using this option.
I/Plot Number --- Displays the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be revised (an
the I/Plot number.
I/Plot Description --- Displays the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric value up to
40 characters).
File Specification --- Displays the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14
characters).
Path Name --- Displays the directory path specifying the directory location to contain the
parameter file (up to 36 characters)
Workstation/Server Name --- Displays the workstation node address to contain the drawing file
1. Select the Revise option from the I/Plot Parameter File form.
The system displays a list of the existing parameter files.
2. Select I/Plot Parameter for Revision.
Select the parameter file to be revised.
The system displays the information on the file selected.
3. Revise I/Plot Data.
Place a data point in the field to be changed and key in the new information.
4. Select Accept to effect the changes to the I/Plot Parameter file.
OR

Plot Setup Manager
Delete I/Plot Parameter File

This command activates an I/Plot Parameter File display list. It is used to select the parameter
file to delete. All of the parameter files accessed by the Drawing Manager can be deleted.
I/Plot Number --- Displays the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be deleted (an
the I/Plot number.
I/Plot Description --- Displays the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric value up to
40 characters).
File Specification --- Displays the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14
characters).
Path Name --- Displays the directory path location of the directory that contains the parameter
file (up to 36 characters).
Workstation/Server Name --- Displays the workstation node address that contains the drawing
file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).
1. Select the Delete option from the I/Plot Parameter File form.
The system displays a list of the existing parameter files.
2. Select I/Plot Parameter file for Deletion.
Select the Parameter file to be deleted.
3. Accept to Delete I/Plot Parameter Definition.
Select Accept to delete.
OR

Index
Create Drawing from ASCII File • 35
A Create Drawing View • 43, 150
Create I/Plot Parameter File • 316
Active Options • 140 Create Options • 32
Add Category • 145, 190 Create Section Drawing View • 171
Align Drawing View • 192 Customizing Drawing Manager • 21
Annotating Drawings • 255
Approval/Revision Interface Form • 125
Approve Drawing • 128 D
Area Volume Graphics • 198 Database Tables • 18
Attach Model • 85, 186 Define View Location • 50, 158
Attach Models to Drawing Views • 55 Delete Drawing • 91
Auto Attach/Verify • 88 Delete Drawing View • 192
Automatic Attach & Verify • 187 Delete I/Plot Parameter File • 318
Automatic Labels • 228 Delete Options • 90
Automatic Title Block Generation • 21 Delete Unassigned View • 291
Detach Model • 87, 188
B Dialog View Rotation • 297
Discrimination Data Creation Form • 103
Before Using Drawing Manager • 10 Discrimination Data Deletion Form • 114
Discrimination Data Form • 102
C Discrimination Data Revision Form • 104
Camera View • 299 Display Report • 202
Cells • 17 Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters
Color Shading • 297 • 27
Compose Drawing • 176 Drawing • 131
Compose Drawing View • 180 Drawing Annotation Symbology • 210
Composing Drawings • 149 Drawing Borders • 12
Coordinate Label • 220 Drawing Categories • 16, 144, 284
Copy Active Drawing • 184 Drawing Management • 29
Copy Another Drawing • 185 Drawing Manager • 31
Copy Drawing • 39 Drawing Manager Overview • 9
Copy Drawing Type • 310 Drawing Manager Theory of Operation • 10
Copy Drawing View • 53, 169 Drawing Manager's Output • 21
Copy From Active Drawing • 82 Drawing Plot Size • 13
Copy From Another Drawing • 83 Drawing Selection • 143
Create Composite Drawing View • 57, 159 Drawing Type • 307
Create Composite Drawing View - Define Drawing Type and Symbology Map • 245
Views • 161 Drawing View Data • 42
Create Composite Drawing View --- Define Drawing Views • 11, 288
Views • 60 Drawings • 11
Create Composite Drawing View - Saved
View • 162 E
Create Composite Drawing View --- Saved Edit Text • 219
View • 61 EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria • 247
Create Composite Drawing Views Example Element Commands • 147
• 63 Equipment Centerlines • 271
Create Composite Plan Drawing View • 173 Exit • 140, 302, 303
Create Drawing • 33

Index
F R
File • 139, 302 Redefine Individual Views • 79
File Design • 140, 303 Reference Categories • 308
Form Left/Right Screen • 302 Reference Model Categories • 188
Format Creation/Revision Form • 100 Reference Models • 81, 182, 285
Format Deletion Form • 101 Remove Category • 146, 191
FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria • Remove Reference • 311
248 Report - Drawing Management Data • 95
Report Approval Form • 125
G Report Creation Form • 121
Report Deletion Form • 124
Graphic Symbology • 292 Report Form • 120
Graphics Environment • 131 Report Format Form • 99
Report Management Defaults Form • 130
L Report Models Form • 97
Label Fence Contents • 231 Report Multiple Submit Form • 127
Label Filter • 313 Review Attribute • 208
Labels • 20 Review/Revise • 189
Level Symbology Off • 301 Review/Revise Category • 144
Level Symbology On • 301 Revise Composite Drawing View Data • 78
Revise Drawing • 73
Revise Drawing View • 75
M Revise Drawing View Data • 76
Mass Annotation • 256 Revise I/Plot Parameter File • 317
Match Planar Element • 296 Revise Options • 72
Measure Distance • 208 Revise Orientation • 80, 196
Revise Report Form • 122
N Revise Revision • 68
Name Label • 211 Revise Site ID for Drawings • 70
Named Item • 46, 153, 290 Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing •
Named Item by Model • 47, 154 72
Named Item by Project • 48, 156 Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing
Nominal Pipe Diameter Value • 26 Type • 71
Revise Site ID for Drawings By Project • 70
Revise Text • 231
O Revise View Data • 194
Overlay Drawing • 207 Revision Markers • 201
Rotate About View • 295
P Rotation 3 Points • 296
Place Cell • 204
Place Labels • 263 S
Place Text and Line • 205 Saved View • 50, 152
Plot • 139 Search Criteria - Component Form • 109
Plot Drawing • 282 Search Criteria - Equipment/Nozzles Form •
Plot Manager • 281 113
Plot Setup Manager • 315 Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form •
PlotPlan • 288 105
Plotting Categories • 312 Search Criteria Data Creation Form • 116,
Preface PDS • 7 250
Project Planner • 287 Search Criteria Data Form • 115
Project Planner Command Menu • 287 Search Criteria Data Revision Form • 117
Project Setup • 305 Search Criteria Deletion Form • 118, 253

Index
Search Criteria for VHL • 249

Search Criteria Revision Form • 251
Search Criteria Symbology Map • 246
Seed Files • 14
Select Another Drawing • 143
Select Drawing - Delete Drawing View • 91
Select Drawing (Discrimination Data
Creation) • 104
Select Model • 290
Set View Orientation • 294
Settings Command • 147
Standard Notes / Code Lists • 20
Supplemental Title Block Data • 25
Symbology Based VHL Drawings • 244
T
The Search Criteria - Component Form •
232
U
Unassigned Views • 197
Update Annotation Labels • 237
Update Labels • 275
Update Views • 292
Update Window • 295
User Commands • 147
V
Vector Hidden Line Manager • 239
View • 131, 302
View Depth • 138
Viewing Commands • 134
Viewing Directions • 137
Viewing Hidden Line Graphics • 177
Viewing Options • 133, 293
Viewing, More Commands • 135
Views • 300

PDS Drawing Manager PD Draw

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PDS Drawing Manager PD Draw

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Plant Design System (PDS)

Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Version 2011 (V12)

Monday, June 20, 2011

Drawing Manager Overview........................................................................................................................ 9

Drawing Management ............................................................................................................................... 29

Drawing Manager ....................................................................................................................................... 31

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 3

Graphics Environment ............................................................................................................................ 131

Composing Drawings.............................................................................................................................. 149

Copy Drawing View ................................................................................................................................. 169

Revision Markers ..................................................................................................................................... 201

4 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Place Text and Line ............................................................................................................................ 205

Update Annotation Labels ...................................................................................................................... 237

Vector Hidden Line Manager .................................................................................................................. 239

Search Criteria for VHL ........................................................................................................................... 249

Annotating Drawings .............................................................................................................................. 255

Plot Manager ............................................................................................................................................ 281

Project Planner ........................................................................................................................................ 287

Project Setup ........................................................................................................................................... 305

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 5

Plot Setup Manager ................................................................................................................................. 315

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 319

6 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

List of PDS Documentation

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 7

8 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Drawing Manager Overview

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 9

Before Using Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager Theory of Operation

10 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 11

12 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Drawing Plot Size

Drawing Plot Size Table

1 8.5"x11" 0.8125" 0.625" 2.125" 0.625 (A)

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 13

6 28"x40" 1.625" 0.9375" 5.625" 0.9375" (F)

14 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 15

Drawing View Specific Labels ;Category 4

16 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

User-defined drawing annotation ;Category 48

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 17

FLOARR FLOW CELL

18 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

MODEL MANAGEMENT DATA

DRAWING MANAGEMENT DATA

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 19

Standard Notes / Code Lists

20 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Drawing Manager's Output

Customizing Drawing Manager

Automatic Title Block Generation

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 21

22 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

! Sample ascii file for automatic title block generation

Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) 23

The ASCII Text Node Definition File

24 Plant Design System (PDS)Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

2, 121, 2, Drawing Number:,,0

Automatic Title Block Generation in Create Drawing